8050 - Printer KONICA MINOLTA - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 8.0/10 📄 426 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL 8050 KONICA MINOLTA

Thank you very much for your purchase of the Konica 8050. This Manual deals with making copies, correct handling of the machine, and precautions for safety. Please read before copying. In order to maintain a satisfactory copying performance, please keep this Manual readily available for reference in the rear pocket of the machine. ENERGY STARS Program The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Konica Business Technologies Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on the following features. Auto Low Power This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes. See p. 2-19 for details. Automatic Shut-Off This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the power supply, thereby reducing energy consumption to 20 W or less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, With the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 2-19 for details. Automatic Duplex Copying To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex) copies, automatically. We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic Shut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function. Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All rights Reserved.

Contents Contents Features of the Konica 8050 Legal Restrictions on Copying Basic

Section 1: Safety Information

Caution Labels and Indicators Requirements for Safe Use... Power Source Environment Precautions for Routine Handling … serres 1 = 10

Section 2: Machine Information

Machine Configuration... External Machine Items Internal Machine Items... Standard/Optional Equipment... Control Panel Layout 2-6 Basic Screen. . FS-115/FS- 215 Finisher (with PK 120 Punching Kh.. PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder... . sr LT-211 Large Capacity Tray… TU-109 Trimmer Unit …. Turning On the Power Switch To Turn On the Power To Turn Off the Power …. ernnrns Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power) Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) … ess Shutting Off / Reducing the Power MANU cn Entering an EKC Password (EKC)... Loading Paper... Loading Paper in Tray 1,2, and 3... Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Loading Paper in LCT (LT-211) Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3. Loading Tabbed Sheets in LOT (LT-211) Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray..

Contents (continued)

Section 3: Copying Operations

• Selecting Colour Mode -2 Positioning Originals p. 3
• -4 Positioning Originals in RADF p. 3
• -4 Positioning Original on Platen Glass -8 Setting Print Quantity us 3-10 To Set Print Quantity.…. en To Change Print Quantity p. 8
• Setting Job During Warm-up p. 3
• -11 To Stop Scanning/Printing … p. 3
• -13 Selecting Paper Size -14 To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) . To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) p. 8
• Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray). Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) p. 3
• -22 To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode p. 3
• -22 To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode)3- -23 Making Double-Sided Copies ue D2, 22) ssteesssnssee serres 3-25 Using RADF su . Using Platen Glass. Making Single-Sided Copies from Double- Sided Originals (»1) . To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) p. 3
• -33 To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) 3-35 To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) -38 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher 8-41 Output Mode for Machine with Finisher 3-45 Selecting Binding Mode 3-52 p. 3

Contents (continued)

Section 4: Helpful Functions

Making Sample Copy (Proof COpy) 4-2 Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) 4-4 Interrupt Copying ss 4-8 Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)... 4-11 Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall).……......... 4-14 Recalling Previous Job Settings 4-15 Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode). To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen. . To Display Help Screen from Other Screens...

Section 5: Troubleshooting

When “Call for Service” Message ls Displayed. Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble Clearing Mishandled Paper... When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) 5-6 When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) 5-8 When “Memory Full” Message Is Tspayed (Memory Over Ro sue D-9 Memory Overflow in Current Job . Memory Overflow in Reserve Job. sereine eee De 10 When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed ennssessne esse 5-11 Troubleshooting Tips 5-12

Section 6: Machine Specifications

Main Body Specifications... 6-2 Main Body... . Option Specifications . RADF (DF-319).. . FS-115/215 In- Bin ‘Stapler Finisher. PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder.. TU-109 Trimmer Unit... PK-120 Punching Kit... .6-6 LT-211 Large Capacity Tray.… éaessnesnsnesrrnerene nr 0-6 Demon Unit. sens near 6-6 Others. Dane esse sense ssnenennenesnece ess enensnenneeensneeeeneensse Ô-Ô

Contents (continued) Advanced

Section 7: Colour Image Adjustment

Contents (continued)

Section 9: Special Original

• Specifying Original Direction p. 9
• -2 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) p. 9
• -4 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) p. 9
• -6 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) -8 Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness) 9-10 p. 9

Section 10: Applications

To Display Application Selection Screen... Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)... Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet).….…..........… Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)... Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)... Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)……...... Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)..…......…. Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image)... Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) …. Repeatng Auiomatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)... Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure).........… Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout).…........ Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) . Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay).….…..... Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overay Memory)... 104

Contents (continued)

Section 11: Network Function

• To Use Web Utilities p. 11
• -2 To Display Information on Machine p. 11
• -4 To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) 11-5 Setting E-Mail Transmission Function p. 11
• -7 Setting E.K.C. Function p. 11
• -9 Setting Scan Transmission Function p. 11
• -19 Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File -23 p. 11

Section 12: Paper and Original Information

Paper Information... 12-2 Paper Weight … drnnenneennnn enr enee nee een esse eeeeeneeeneneneeeeneeeeeesese À 22 Tray/ Exit Tray Capaciy… DRE EEE RES 27 | Paper Size... ..12-6 Special Paper i in | Mutti- Sheet * Bypass Tray: To Store Copy Paper … eur EEE Original Information... ss. Platen Glass Originals. en RADF Originals...

Section 13: Maintenance & Supplies

Contents (continued)

Section 14: Key Operator Mode

An Outline of the Key Operator Mode... 14-2 How to Access the Key Operator Mode... 14-2 [1] System Initial Setting 14-4 [1] Date & Time Setting.... .. 14-4 [2] Language Select Setting.. [3] IP Address Setting .. 14-7 [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting .. 14-8 [2] Copier Initial Setting................................... 14-10 [3] User Setting Mode 14-11 [1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting … .. 14-11 [4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function n Seting . How to Access the EKC Setting Mode... . [1] E.K.C. Data Edit... [21 E.K.C. AII Count Reset. [3] E.K.C. Function Setting..…............................. [4] Scanner Function Setting................................ [5] Lock/Delete Job Memory... [6] Paper Type / Special Size Set... [1] Paper Type / Special Size Set . [21 Paper Type Set (Bypass). [7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment... sennrenneee nee 14-24 [8] Key Operator Data Setting.…................................. 14-25 [9] Weekly Timer.….................................. 14-26 How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode … .. 14-27 [1] Weekly Timer On/Off Seting… ere …. 14-28 [21 Timer Setting... casses een esse 14-29 [3] Timer Action On/Off Setting.… enenenesnnsenr ere 14-91 [4] Lunch Hour Off Setting .… 14-82 [P] Timer Interrupt Password Setting [10] Control Panel Adjustment .… [11] Tray Auto Select Setting 14-35 [12] Power Save Setting 14-36 [13] Memory Switch Setting 14-37 [14] Machine Management List Print... 14-43 [15] Call Remote Centre 14-44 [16] Finisher Adjustment 14-45

Contents (continued)

Section 14: Key Operator Mode (continued)

[17] Front & Back Density Setting 14-47 [18] Scan Transmission Setting ….. [19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting. [20] AE Adjustment [21] Execute Adjustment Operation 14-52 [22] Magnification Adjustment 14-53 [23] Timing Adjustment 14-54 [24] Centring Adjustment.…................................. 14-56 [25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment 14-57 Index viii

Features of the Konica 8050 AE - Automatic Exposure Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original. AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Paper Size is selected manually. Automatically selected when the AMS key is touched. APS - Automatic Paper Selection Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents. ATS - Automatic Tray Switching Automatically switches tray to allow copying to continue without interruption if the selected tray empties while copying is in progress. Auto Layout The original image on the platen glass or in the document feeder is copied and centred on a sheet. Auto Low Power Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity. Auto Reset Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity. Auto Shut-Off Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity. Booklet Creates a multiple page signature booklet copied on both sides of paper in 12 or 22 copy mode. Chapter Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only duplex mode (12) is compatible with this feature. Colour Mode Copies full-coloured originals or makes single-coloured copies, and also adjusts image quality of the copies. Combination Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper to create a draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving paper. Copy Density Manually selects up to 9 density levels. Copy Mode Selects the desired simplex mode (11 or 2>1); or duplex mode (12 or 22). Counter List Displays on the screen and prints the following data: total counter of the machine, copier counter, print counter and the date when the counter started.

(continued) Density Shift Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Map) to three levels lighter or three levels darker. Dual Page Copies Both pages of an open book or A3/B4 size sheet separately onto two A4/B5 size sheets in 11 mode or separately onto each side of one A4/B5 size sheet in 1»2 mode. You can use the Dual Page mode with the Front or Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages. Frame/Fold Erasure Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300 mm), Fold (1 - 99 mm), or Frame & Fold. Image Insert Stores pages in memory from the platen glass, and inserts the pages into a document copied from the document feeder. Image Shift Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges (shift amount from O0 - 250 mm, in 1 mm increments); reduces image to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from O - 250 mm, in 1 mm increments). Interrupt Copying Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of the copier features for the interrupt job. Job Memory Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. All compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after they are selected. Job Status Displays the Job Status Screen to view the current machine status, changes the operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or displays the previous job list. Lens Mode (Fixed, Zoom) Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set ratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% - 400% in 1% increments. Machine Status Confirmation Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation. Manual Shut-off Shuts off the machine power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. Mixed Original Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals.

(continued) Multi-Page Enlargement Makes an enlarged copy, made up of several copied pages divided and enlarged from an original image. Network Function by Web Browser When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, uses a web browser on the PC to check the machine or job information, and to perform the Key Operator settings concerning the network environment. Non-Image Area Erase When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as black. Non STD Size for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Enters the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray using the touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed. Non STD Size for Original Identifies the special original size which the 8050 cannot detect, in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing. Original Image Enhances photo image in PHOTO mode, regular image in TEXT/PHOTO mode, text image in TEXT mode, coloured image with small text in MAP mode. Original Type Improves the image quality by specifying the printed original type. Output Mode for Machine with FS-115/215 Finisher Installed: Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray Fold and Stitch & Fold modes using the booklet tray (FS-215 only) Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed: Non-sort, Rotation sort, Group, and Rotation group modes are available in combination with Face down or Face up exit. Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. Output for FS-115/215 Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder Installed: Cover Sheet mode Off-Line Finishing mode For details, see Section 8: Advanced Information. Overlay Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another document. For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic design or logo into the pages of your document. Overlay Memory Same as for Overlay except the overlay image is stored in memory.

(continued) Paper Capacity Total 1,750 sheets, including three 500-sheet trays and a 250-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray. Total 4,250 sheets, including 2,500-sheet optional large capacity tray. Platen Memory Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder and inserts the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be displayed. Power Saver Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFA on the control panel. Program Job Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditions for each original, then prints all the documents collectively. Proof Copy To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by pressing [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touching PROOF COPY on the Check Screen. Punch Mode for FS-115/215 Finisher with PK-120 Punching Kit Installed: Punches four holes in output copies. Repeat Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down the page as many times as the repeat width setting (10 - 150 mm) pemmits in manual or auto. Reserve Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the 8050 is busy printing or copying. Reverse Image Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa. Rotation Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper. Rotation Exit (Rotation Sort / Rotation Group) When no Finisher is installed, Rotation Exit alternately switches the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be sure to load both A4 and A4R in separate trays (including the Multi-sheet bypass tray) before selecting this feature. Sheet/Cover Insertion Insert up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass tray, or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass tray to enhance the presentation of multi-page documents. Stamp Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numbering onto the output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of the copies. xil

(continued) Staple Selects the stapling position and number of staples. STD Size (Special) Detects the standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected when loaded in a main body tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray. Tab Paper Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper. Three-Fold Mode for Machine with FS-215 Finisher Installed: Folds A4 or 8.5”’x11”R output copies in three. Trimming Mode for FS-215 Finisher with TU-109 Trimmer Unit Installed: Trim the end of folded or stitched & folded booklets. Weekly Timer Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main body power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode. Wide Size Paper Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size. Z-Folded Original This feature sets the RADF to accept Z-folded originals. xii

Legal Restrictions on Copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. <Financial Instruments> + Personal checks + Travelers checks + Money orders + Certificates of deposit + Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness + Stock certificates <Legal Documents> Food stamps Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Checks or draîfts drawn by government agencies Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled) Passports Immigration papers Motor vehicle licenses and titles House and property titles and deeds <General> -* Identification cards, badges, or insignias + Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner You are prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel. xiv

Caution Labels and Indicators The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or serious injury. (Right side of the fixing unit) CAUTION EE EEE F nn FT = RE NOT put your hand between the CEE LE body and developing otherwise you may be /\ CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit; otherwise you may be injured. (RE EUDADO ZA CAUTION A ATTENTION The fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned L'Hoisse Obertlächel |

2) PRECAUCION DO NOT TOUCH.

(Top surface of the fixing unit)

(Inside of the fixing unit) ee . Use care and draw it out front gently; otherwise you may be injured. 1-2

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued) A CAUTION facaunon_[acaunon [a arreone] faarremon[aarremon [ax DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF fa rrecconfavonsienr [a #18 Jacumano fameacon] za) hinge portions; otherwise you may be injured. (Rear side of the RADF) (Right rear side of the Main body) (Inside of the LCT) Reura [auremonf _ fa mecauconf a curoavo RTE C Éustrfare - | fasrcaucn | a 1 ENTRE MPEIN WARNING État A wAnnNe ss À CAUTION DO NOT throw the toner ns recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the To avoid any unexpected injury, DO NOT put your hand toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. 4 the bottom plate of the LCT. into the holes (3 places) on

A CAUTION Use care after opening the paper exit outlet. DO NOT put your hand into it; otherwise you may be injured. 1-4 JA CAUTION To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them, and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary (main) tray goes up. ACAUTION À ATTENTION À CUIDADO ZA CAUTION A ATTENTION AVORSICHT ZAPRECAUCION |, RATTENZIONE —|' VER À CAUTION Inside the lower paper exit outlet is the roller it. DO NOT put nto it; otherwise you may be injured.

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued) À CAUTION Burns or injury may occur from touching the areas detailed in the caution labels and caution indicators. Do not remove caution labels or indicators. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them legible, or if the caution label or indicator is damaged, please contact your service representative for replacement labels. The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety cautions. LULU

Action highly liable to cause death or serious injury. AN WARNING: Action liable to cause death or serious injury. AN CAUTION: Action liable to cause minor injury, machine trouble or physical damage.

If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or reading the manual, be sure to follow the information. Q) Reminder! If the safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc., please procure a new copy from your service representative.

Requirements for Safe Use To ensure your safe use of the machine, the following describes the precautions you are required to observe without fail for the power source of the machine and during installation and routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them. Power Source ÂÀ CAUTION: Plug Socket + A plug socket is limited in capacity. Use only a power source with the correct rating for the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or overheating may occur. - Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors. À CAUTION: Power Plug and Cord + Be sure to insert the power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of smoking or overheating. If the inserted power plug is loose in the socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect the plug and contact your electrical contractor. - For plug cable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. + Do not bend or crush the power cord. If your copier power cord is bent or damaged in any way, contact your service representative immediately. Do not attempt to repair it yourself, and do not continue to operate the copier. À damaged power cord may result in overheating, a short circuit, or fire. + Do not bundie or coil the power cord of the copier. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. ÂÀ CAUTION: Connecting Multiple Loads to One Socket Outlet Prohibited Never connect multiple loads to one socket outlet using a multi-outlet extension cord or branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. ÂÀ CAUTION: Extension Cord An extension cord must never be used with this machine.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) Environment VAN CAUTION: Prevention of Fire Do not install near flammable materials, curtains and volatile combustibles, that can catch or cause fire. AN CAUTION: Prevention of Short Circuit Do not install the copier where it could be splashed with rain water, or water from a tap, to avoid a short circuit. À CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity + Keep away from direct sunlight, heat sources such as stoves, cool air from an air conditioner and hot air from a heater.

• Avoid any environment that is outside the range shown below: 10 to 30°C in temperature 10 to 80% in humidity A CAUTION: Ventilation + Keepthe installation place well-ventilated. + Keep away from dust or corrosive gases. These materials may cause poor image quality. - During the use of machine, the machine generates ozone in an insufficient amount to cause any hazard to the human body. However, if the machine is used in a poorly ventilated room, many copies are made, or more than one copier is used at the same time, an odor may be detected. Ensure adequate ventilation for a comfortable working environment. AN CAUTION: Vibration Do not install on a floor which is subject to vibration or is not level. ÂÀ CAUTION: Transportation Be sure to contact your service representative when moving or transporting the machine. If you move the machine with the Hard disk drive or Memory unit installed, machine trouble may be caused by vibration.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) AN CAUTION: Installation Space Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic inspection. Leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the rear fan. Unit: mm Unit: mm LL Il 570 315 760 200-|

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) Unit: mm Unit: mm 100 Î [, | 440

Konica 8050 + DF-319 + FS-215 + PI-110 + LT-211 + TU-109A Kit + TU-109 (Front) ÿ) Reminder! Finisher primary (main) tray of FS-115/215 Finisher gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) Precautions for Routine Handling AN WARNING: Toner Recovery Box DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. ÂÀ CAUTION: Actions in Response to Troubles + Ifthe Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued anymore, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the report code as stated on the 2nd line of the message, then switch off the copier and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the report code. + Do not touch the high temperature parts indicated with CAUTION labels or described in the manual. + Do not touch the inside of the machine for any other purpose than removing jammed paper or adding toner. + If machine repair is necessary, be sure to contact your service representative. Never attempt to repair it by yourself. -_ If any abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop using it, turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug and contact your service representative. -_Ifthe breakertrips or the fuse blows, turn off the power switch, reset the breaker or the fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your service representative. - Ensure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never use a fuse with an incorrect rating. VAN CAUTION: Prevention of Fire Do not use volatile combustibles, such as thinner or alcohol, near the machine. ÂÀ CAUTION: Prohibition of Machine Modification Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) AN CAUTION: Prevention of Machine Troubles + Do not drop small metallic objects, such as paper clips or staples, inside the machine. + Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a a? vase, books or ornaments on the machine. AN CAUTION: Recommendation of Periodic Q Q Check Be sure to periodically check the following points:

1) The main cord or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat.

2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the cord is not cut or scratched.

8) The grounding wire is correctly connected.

4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust.

If you find anything abnormal in the above items, stop using the machine and contact your service representative. ÂÀ CAUTION: Toner + Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice. + Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. ÂÀ CAUTION: Paper Check paper to be sure it conforms to the specifications outlined in Section 12. + Do not use paper with staples or paper that conducts electricity (silver, carbon, etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire. - To avoid machine trouble, do not use heat-sensitive paper, coloured transparency, or paper specifically designed for ink-jet printers, such as photo-paper. À CAUTION: Power Saver and Weekly Timer + In Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the main power supply and power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time. + When the Weekly Timer function is operating, turning power OFF will disable the function. ÂÀ CAUTION: Inside the Booklet Mode Outlet Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it, when removing the folded or stitched & folded sheet; otherwise you may be injured. ÂÀ CAUTION: Finisher Paper Exit Outlet To avoid injury when stapling large size copies, DO NOT put your hand into the open Paper Exit Outlet.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) ÂÀ CAUTION: Fixing Unit The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be careful when withdrawing the fixing unit. ÂÀ WARNING: Drum Unit The internal drum unit generates a high voltage. To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH. ÂÀ CAUTION: LCT Bottom Plate To avoid any unexpected injury, DO NOT put your hand into the holes (3 places) on the bottom plate of the LCT. ÂÀ CAUTION: Disposal of Copier Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your service representative, who can arrange for its safe disposal. If you change the place of installation, please contact your service representative. ÂÀ CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray The exit tray capacity is max. 150 sheets (80 g/m° paper). If a copy run of more than 150 is required, be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. ÂÀ CAUTION: FS-115/215 Finisher Paper Capacity The FS-115 Finisher is equipped with two exit trays, and FS-215 Finisher is equipped with three exit trays. Select an exit tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. To prevent paper misfeed, do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the capacity stated in

Section 12, be sure to unload the exit tray while the copier is still copying. Failure to

do so will cause the copier to jam. AN CAUTION: FS-115/215 Finisher Primary (Main) Tray When printed materials are removed from the primary (main) tray of the Finisher, the tray goes up automatically. To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them, and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary tray goes up.

Machine Configuration (continued) OUR RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) (option) automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying. Platen cover (option) covers documents to be copied and holds them in place. Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying. Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine. Toner access door opens to replenish the black toner or colour toner. Toner recovery box opens to replace the filled toner box with new one. Multi-sheet bypass tray opens to use copy paper of the other size or type than those loaded in the main body trays or LCT. Tray 4 (LT-211 Large Capacity Tray) (option) holds 2,500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) from 13”x19” to B5. Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Tray 3 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) from 13”x19” to A5R. Tray 2 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) from 13”x19” to A5R. Tray 1 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) from 13”x19” to A5R. Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. FS-115 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished sets. FS-215 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished sets. FS-215 also folds or staples & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, or folds max. 3 copies in three. TU-109A kit (option) connects the finisher and trimmer unit. TU-109 Trimmer unit (option) trims the end of booklet. PI-110 Cover sheet feeder (option) loads cover sheet paper and feeds the sheet as cover to the sorted sets, used in combination with FS-115/215 Finisher. Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed. LCD Touch screen displays interactive operation screens. Control panel controls copier operations and displays messages as required.

Machine Configuration (continued) Internal Machine Items 5 Black print counter

4 Total counter 7 LE) 3 Main power — switch 2 Fixing unit 1 Lever A 1 Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for removal of mishandled paper. 2 Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper. 3 Main power switch used only by service representative turns machine power on/off when pressed. 4 Total counter indicates the total number of prints made. 5 Black print counter indicates the total number of the black prints made. 2-4

Machine Configuration (continued) — [5 PK-120 Punching kit PI-110 Cover sheet feeder Standard/Optional Equipment CV-131 Platen cover DF-319 Document feeder

Machine Configuration (continued) Control Panel Layout

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DIAL can be turned to adjust the touch panel contrast. LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status, help information, interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions. CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job. HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function, or to access the Key Operator Mode Screen. KEYPAD enters numeric values. PRINTER switches the machine operation mode to printer. (This key does not function at present.) SCANNER switches the machine operation mode to scanner. COPY switches the machine operation mode to copy. TIMER lights when the timer function is set. INTERRUPT stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass. POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier is inactive, or activates Timer Interrupt mode when Weekly Timer function is active. STOP stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory. PROOF COPY outpuis a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected propery. START activates copying or scanning. [C] (CLEAR QTY.) allows resetting of print quantity. [P] (COUNTER) displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions. AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to Key Operator settings.

Machine Configuration (continued) 18 JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions. 19 ACCESS sets the machine to allow copying only when the EKC password is entered. À CAUTION The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass. Do not drop heavy objects on the glass or put excess weight or pressure on it, otherwise the glass may be scratched or break to cause injury. À CAUTION When the Call for Service Screen (p. 5-2) is displayed, be sure to contact your service representative immediately. Q DETAILS The control panel of this machine can be slightly lowered to three angled positions to ensure easy access by anyone, regardless of the physical or positional status of the operator. Your authorized Konica service representative can make this setting for you.

| 19 Colour mode area | 17 Paper size area 15 STORE key 20 Output mode keys 18 Copy mode area 14 ROTATION OFF key —— 21 Output icon area 13 APPLICATION key 16 Lens mode area 12 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key —| 11 IMAGE ADJUST key — Folder keys: FREE JOB is selected to specify a copy job conditions. When scanning starts, FREE JOB changes to SCAN JOB, then changes to PRINT JOB when the machine starts printing. FREE JOB ait the right side of SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB can be touched to specify a reserve job conditions. Up to 7 reserve jobs can be set. The arrow keys at the right side of folder keys are used to scroll. Word icons: ADD TONER icon is displayed when toner supply becomes low. The toner colour to be supplied is indicated by a letter; C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), or K (black). PM CALL icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due. Printer icon indicates the machine status when operating as a printer. Graphic icons: Original direction icon indicates the original direction specified on the Special Original popup menu. Image adjust icon indicates the enhance mode specified on the Special Original popup menu. Rotation icon is displayed when Rotation automatically functions. Toner recovery box icon is displayed when replacement of the toner recovery box is due. PM icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due.

Machine Configuration (continued) Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that time. Reserve job counits the reserve jobs already specified. Original count counis the original pages placed in the document feeder as they are scanned. TYPE/SIZE key is touched to specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Count/Set indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of the set count while printing. Memory indicator indicates the remaining memory available for the next operation. STATUS key is touched to view the current job status, to change the printing order of reserve jobs, or to cancel printing a reserve job. IMAGE ADJUST key is touched to display five sorts of the Image Adjustment Setting Screens to adjust the image quality. SPECIAL ORIGINAL key is touched to specify the condition of originals to be scanned. APPLICATION key is touched to select various application functions. ROTATION OFF key is touched to release the Rotation function. STORE key is touched to store scanned images into memory. Lens mode area is used to select the desired magnification ratio. Paper size area is used to select the desired paper size or APS. Copy mode area is used to select the copy mode (1à1, 12, 21, or 2R2). Colour mode area is used to specify the desired colour mode (single colour, black, full colour, or auto). Output mode keys are used to specify the desired output mode. Output icon area displays the appropriate output icon according to the selected output mode.

Machine Configuration (continued) FS-115/FS-215 Finisher (with PK-120 Punching Kit) 4 Secondary 4 Secondary (Sub) tray (Sub) tray | door Le | 1 Finisher door <= tr. ST. /n)N /|1s | |

3 primary 3 ina lain) tra) ain) tra (Main) tray &| (Main) tray W 2 Booklet tray (FS-215 Finisher only) FS-115 Finisher FS-215 Finisher Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper, replenishing staples, and emptying waste basket of Punching kit. Booklet tray (FS-215 Finisher only) holds sets output in Fold mode, Stapling & Fold mode, or Three-fold mode. Primary (Main) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset), Staple-sort mode, or Group mode (offset). Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Sort mode or Group mode with face down/up mode. 2-10

Machine Configuration (continued) 4 Subtray conveyance lever 3 Cover sheet conveyance D lever _ 1 Entrance lever 4 Sub tray conveyance lever 3 Cover sheet 5 Stacker conveyance conveyance = lever lever PK-120 Punching kit (option) Entrance lever 9 Trash basket (option) l I 78 Stacker unit 6 Lower lever FS-215 Finisher 10 Stacker unit handle with PK-120 Punching kit Entrance lever opens downward to remove mishandled paper. PK-120 Punching kit (option) punches file holes in the output copies. Cover sheet conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Sub tray conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Stacker conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Lower lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Stacker unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the Stacker unit. Stacker unit folds or stitches & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, and also folds max. 3 copies in three. Waste basket (option) holds waste paper punched out. Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandied paper and replacement of staple cartridge. Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge to be replaced when supplying staples. 2-11

Machine Configuration (continued) PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder 3 Upper tray guide plates 4 Upper tray 2 Upper unit release lever 6 Lower tray guide plates d S A. 1 Cover sheet feeder control panel Cover sheet feeder control panel controls cover sheet feeder operations. Upper unit release lever can be moved to slide the upper unit of cover sheet feeder for removal of mishandled paper. 3 Upper tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position. Upper tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode. 5 Lower tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode or a copied set in manual stapling/punching/three-fold mode. 6 Lower tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position. D =

Machine Configuration (continued) LT-211 Large Capacity Tray 8 © ND = © © NJ Oo 1 5 Paper feed roller 6 LCT paper guides 1 LCT lever / 9 Rear stopper / knob | 10 LCT bottom plate 3 LOT left side door

LCT lever can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandled paper. LCT top door opens to allow paper loading or removal of mishandied paper. LCT left side door opens to allow removal of mishandied paper. Paper loading button is pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading paper. Paper feed roller conveys the copy paper to the main body. LCT paper guides hold copy paper to fix the position. LCT paper guide knobs can be turned to move or fix the LCT paper guide. Rear stopper fixes the rear end of copy paper. Rear stopper knobs can be turned to move or fix the rear stopper. LCT bottom plate goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low, and goes down when the paper loading button is pressed. 2-13

Machine Configuration (continued) TU-109 Trimmer Unit

5 Trimmer stacker cover 4 Trimmer unit tray 3 Trimmer stacker Front-right cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper. Trimmer stacker holds sets output in Trimming mode. Trimmer unit tray slides to the left side each time a trimmed booklet is delivered. Trimmer stacker cover opens to allow you to take out the finished sets. TU-109A kit connects the Finisher and Trimmer unit. FS-215 Finisher allows the Trimmer unit to be installed. Q) Reminder! DO NOT place heavy objects on the trimmer stacker or apply any weight on it, and DO NOT use it for storage. Excessive weight applied to the inside or outside of the trimmer stacker will damage the equipment. 2-14

Machine Configuration (continued) 1 Trimmer unit knob

7 3 Trimmer pressure release lever 2 Wast basket 1 Trimmer unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper. 2 Waste basket holds waste paper cut off from the booklets. 3 Trimmer pressure release lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. 2-15

Turning On the Power Switch To Turn On the Power

1. Turn ONthe power switch.

The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel. Q DETAILS The main power switch is located on the upper-left side of the internal main body. Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.

2. The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screens will be displayed.

Konica A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch screen, seven types of Warm-up Screens will be displayed in succession for approx. 7.0 minutes. 2-16

Turning On the Power Switch (continued) CZ HT You can set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up. Touch the LCD screen to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic Screen, then check that the message “Ready to copy reserve” is displayed on the Basic Screen. See p.3-11 to p. 3-12.

3. The Basic Screen will be displayed.

The message on the Basic Screen will inform you that copying job is now available. Position original in the RADF face up FRÉE

GUTPUT COLOUR MODE LENS MODE

[000 COLOUR { FULL 4 4 Q DETAILS + When the initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the modified conditions will be displayed on the Basic Screen. + When “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed, enter your password to use the machine. + When “Set the key counter” is displayed, insert the key counter to its inlet on the right side of the main body. 2-17

Turning On the Power Switch (continued) To Turn Off the Power

1. Turn OFF the power switch.

The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel. The touch screen and all the LEDs on the control panel will go out. ÿ) Reminder! Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation. Q DETAILS When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, turning off the power switch will deactivate the function. 2-18

Turning On the Power Switch (continued) Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power) This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period (initially 15 minutes) of copier inactivity. The LCD screen will go off. C2 Hinr The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For information about the Key Operator setting, see p. 14-56. To start a copying job, press any key on the control panel. The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brighiness. Q DETAILS + Ifthe Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will be turned off without the LCD screen becoming dark. + The LCD screen will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the Jam Position Screen is displayed. Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) This function automatically shuts off the power after a specified period (initially 90 minutes) of copier inactivity. To start a copying job, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copying operation will become available. if Es Raul

C2 Hirs + The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For information about the Key Operator setting, see p. 14-56. + When “Timer interrupt mode / Enter password” is displayed after pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF], see p. 8-2 and follow the procedure to continue. 2-19

Turning On the Power Switch (continued) Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually Follow the procedure below to shut off the power manually. CZ HIT The machine is initially set to activate the Manual Shut-Off function. The Manual Low Power can be selected in the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42. Î1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it.

srôP. Q DETAILS If Manual Low Power is selected in the Key Operator setting, the machine automatically activates the Low Power mode before releasing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].

2. The Shut-Off mode will be activated.

The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off. Q DETAILS Be sure to press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode will not be activated. Press POWER SAVER more than one second, then release it for shut off mode Press POWER SAVER continuously more than one second for low power mode To release the mode, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The machine will be available for copying operation. 2-20

Turning On the Power Switch (continued) Entering an EKC Password (EKC) The Electronic Key Counter (EKC) allows the Key Operator to monitor all copying activities by controlling EKC password accounts. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can be set. The EKC is not factory-set. An EKC password is required only when the EKC is activated, a User Password is assigned, and “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed on the touch screen. Copying will be available by following procedure:

C2 Hinr For details of the EKC setting, see p. 14-12 to p. 14-19. Enter EKC password. Enter your 8-digit EKC password, using the keypad. C2 nr To set an EKC password, see p. 14-14 to p. 14-16. Q DETAILS If an invalid EKC password is entered, continue by entering the correct password. Press [START]. Your current copy count and copy limit will be displayed for 3 sec. Current count / limit 018888/025000 Start a copying job. When the message changes to “Ready to copy”, copying job is available on the machine. Q DETAILS When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the message “Copy limit reached” will be displayed. In that case, contact the Key Operator to reset your copy limit. Press [ACCESS]. The initial state will be restored, with the message “Enter E.K.C. password” displayed on the screen. 2-21

Loading Paper A paper indicator is shown on each tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper level (six levels are provided: HLULEEE ) of the tray. (The Multi-sheet bypass tray displays only “ ] ” when paper in the tray becomes empty.) When paper supply in a tray becomes low, the indicator “|_]” appears on the tray key, and then it changes to “ LH] ” when paper in that tray becomes empty and the tray key blinks on the screen. Position original in the RADF face up

Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper. 2-22 Q DETAILS Each tray key displays a paper type and a number which indicates the paper weight to be loaded. The following paper types are provided: Normal, Recycled, Coloured, High Q, Coated, Colour sp, Tab paper, Exclusive A to D The numbers corresponding to the paper weight are: 1: 64-74 g/m 2:75-80 g/m°, 8: 81-105 g/m > 4:106-162 g/me, 5: 163-209 g/me, 6:210-256 g/n (for LCT and Muläi-sheet bypass tray only) Key Operator can change this setting. See p. 14-21 to p. 14-22 for the main body trays and the LCT. See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for the Multi-sheet bypass tray. W) Reminder! + Be sure to load only the paper type and weight set for the tray. + Using paper with punch holes, copy result may not be satisfactory due to the hole positions.

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Paper in Tray 1 ,2, and 3

1. Withdraw tray 1,2, or 3, and open the paper feed roller.

À CAUTION Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured. ÿ) Reminder! Withdraw the tray completely until the green line appears at the left rear side of the tray. Otherwise, the paper feed roller may not open or machine trouble may be caused. To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 4. If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.

2. Adjust the position of the side guide plate.

Pull up the lock lever at the front, then slide the side guide plate to the desired position. Q DETAILS See the size indication on the bottom plate of the tray to determine the position of the side guide plate. Push down the lock lever firmly until it clicks in position in order to fix the side guide plate. 2-23

Loading Paper (continued) Q) Reminder! Be sure to fix the side guide plate in position according to the size indication on the tray bottom plate so that the machine can detect the correct paper size.

3. Adijust the position of the rear stopper.

To slide the rear stopper to the right, hold it at the upper part and slide it while pressing down slightly. On the other hand, hold the rear stopper at the lower part to slide it to the left. ÿ) Reminder! Be sure to press down the rear stopper when moving it to the right, and also be sure to hold it at the lower part when moving it to the left. Do not move the rear stopper forcibly, otherwise it may be damaged. 4, Place paper on the tray. Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray, then align the rear stopper to the paper. M Reminder! + Be sure that the rear guide plate is securely aligned to the paper; otherwise machine trouble may occur. + Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate. 2-24

Loading Paper (continued)

5. When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

6. Gently push in the tray until it locks into place.

The indicator “|+|” on the tray key will change to “[E|”. Q) Reminder! Do not clam the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may be caused. 2-25

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray When using the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type to be loaded on the tray at the same time. See p. 3-18 to p. 8-21 for details.

1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of

the copier. ÿ) Reminder! + _Stack paper up to 250 sheets 90 g/m?. When loading special paper, do not exceed the limit indicated on the paper guides, otherwise paper misfeed may occur. + The transparency film or ink-jet paper is not available on this machine. Do not load the transparency film or ink-jet paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

3. When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Paper in LCT (LT-211)

1. Open the LCT top door.

The LCT bottom plate will go up. Q) Reminder! Without the power turned on, the LCT bottom plate will not function. Be sure to turn on the power switch before loading paper in the LCT. To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 3. If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.

2. Adijust the position of the LCT paper guides and rear stopper.

(1) Turn the four LCT paper guide knobs and two rear stopper knobs counterclockwise to loosen them. 2-27

Loading Paper (continued) (2) Move the upper part of the two LCT paper guides to the appropriate positions according to the size indication, then turn the LCT paper guide knobs (two for each) clockwise to fix the guides. (3) Move the position of the rear stopper to the appropriate positions according to the size indication on the bottom plate, then turn the two rear stopper knobs clockwise to fix the rear stopper.

3. Press the paper loading button once, then load the paper into the

LCT. The LCT bottom plate will go down. 2-28

Loading Paper (continued)

4. Repeat the step 3 until the bottom plate will not go down any more.

ÿ) Reminder! + Do not load above the limit indicated on the LCT paper guides. + Be sure that the rear stopper is correctly positioned according to the paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.

5. Close the LCT top door.

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3 When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen, follow the procedure below to supply the tray with tabbed sheets. C2 nr The tray paper type can be specified in the Key Operator setting. For details, see p. 14-21 to p. 14-22. 1st TAB Printed Secen 1 side Inradusion 2nd TAB -3rd TAB L —

Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. ist we 2nd TAB sde == rar dr modos ; mes l side IX 1stTABS En 2nd TABS 3 FINISHED SETS 3rd TABS Q) Reminder! The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less. Withdraw tray 1,2, or 3. Open the paper feed roller. Place the tabbed sheets on the tray as illustrated above. & © ND = Move the green levers (located at the front and the left side) to the edge of the paper.

Close the paper feed roller, then push in the tray until it locks into place. 2-30

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (LT-211) Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. 1st TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 2 Printed _L 2nd TAB side 3rd TAB Sr TAB

Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. istTAB 2nd TAB {st TAB 2nd TAB

M Reminder! + The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less. + To load the tabbed sheets into LCT, contact your service representative to position the rear stopper for the paper size to be loaded. Open the LCT top door. Press the paper loading button to lower the LCT bottom plate. Load the tabbed sheets into the LCT as illustrated above. Close the LCT top door. SON 2-31

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. 1stTAB

1st TAB Section 1 Secton 1 2nd TAB roger Printed 8rd TAB | side | 2nd TAB 3rd TAB

Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. Pa 1/ES 1stTAB _,2nd TAB 2ndTABS | Sscton 1 Sacton 1 Ep rdTABS | Pricer roducton tot Secton 1

| Printed _L / side irocucton 8rd TAB 3 FINISHED SETS M Reminder! The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier. : Load tabbed sheets asillustrated above. &s w N Adjust the paper guides to the paper size. Specify the paper type as TAB for the Multi-sheet bypass tray. HINT See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21 for specifying the paper type of the Multi-sheet bypass tray. 2-32

• SECTION Copying Operations How to Make a Basic Copy Selecting Colour Mode 3-2 Positioning Originals p. 3
• -4 Setting Print Quantity p. 3
• -10 Setting Job During Warm-up 3-11 To Stop Scanning/Printing p. 3
• -13 Selecting Paper Size … p. 3
• -14 Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) p. 3
• -18 Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) p. 3
• -22 Making Double-Sided Copies (12, 2B2) p. 8
• -25 Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2»- 1). 3-31 To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) 3-33 To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) -35 To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) … 3-38 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher.… … …. 3-41 Output Mode for Machine with Finisher … p. 8
• -45 Selecting Binding Mode -52 p. 3

Selecting Colour Mode The following four colour modes are available: AUTO mode detects whether the scanned original is coloured or black-and-white image, and automatically selects either FULL COLOUR mode or BLACK mode for copying. FULL ÉOLOUR mode makes full-coloured copies whether the original image is coloured or not. BLACK mode makes black-and-white copies whether the original image is coloured or not. SINGLE COLOUR mode copies in one colour to be selected from red, green, blue, magenta, cyan, or yellow. The FULL COLOUR mode is initially selected. Follow the procedure below to change the Colour mode. Specification for Colour Mode Q A colour mode is incompatible with another colour mode. © Incompatible with AUTO: Tab Paper, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected), Combination, Booklet, Reverse Image, Overlay, Overlay Memory © Incompatible with FULL COLOUR: Tab Paper, Reverse Image © Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Tab Paper C2 nr The colour adjustment function is provided on this machine. See Section 7: Colour Adjustment. Q DETAILS Some adjustments cannot be made in the BLACK mode and SINGLE COLOUR mode. Incompatible with BLACK: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour Adjust, Colour Balance, Any function except Auto in Screen, Colour/Text of Image Judge in Others, Original Type in Special Original Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour Adjust, Colour Balance, Colour/Text of Image Judge in Others, Original Type in Special Original

1. Touch a mode key under the COLOUR MODE on the Basic

Screen to select the desired Colour mode. Position original in the RADF face u FREE Jo8 01 OUTPUT ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Selecting Colour Mode (continued) FULL COLOURis already highlighted when the initial settings are restored. CZ HT The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 14-10 for details. Selecting SINGLE COLOUR will display the popup menu to specify a colour. Position original in the RADF face up

RESERVE JOB O ORIGINAL COUNT ©

Touch the desired colour key, then touch OK. The selected colour will be indicated under the COLOUR MODE indication of the Basic Screen, with the SINGLE COLOUR key highlighted. Q DETAILS Touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

CZ HINT If the colour adjustment is desired, see Section 7: Colour Adjustment.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CZ HiNT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Positioning Originals Set the originals in the RADF or on the platen glass to copy. Positioning Originals in RADF The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the platen area, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled, smooth, flat originals. CZ HIT See p. 12-10 for details of the original sizes available in the RADF. Positioning originals in Normal mode

1. Arrange originals in order.

2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. The direction of the originals should conform to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time. Q) Reminder! The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double- sided copies or using Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9- 2 to p. 9-3 for details. + Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details. + Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals. M Reminder! Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically. 3-4

Positioning Originals (continued)

Positioning Originals (continued) Positioning originals in Mixed original mode Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder. C2 Hirs + Touse the Mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 9-6 to p. 9-7. + See p. 12-10 for available combinations of mixed originals.

1. Arrange originals in order.

Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below. Tothe | Tothe left depth

2. Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of

the document feeder tray. Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time. Q) Reminder! + Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details. + Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals. Q) Reminder! Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.

Positioning Originals (continued) Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size detection sensor of the RADF. CZ Hits + To use the Z-Folded original mode, see procedure on p. 9-8 to p. 9-9. + See p. 12-11 for available sizes of folded originals.

1. Arrange originals in order.

2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time. M Reminder! + Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-9 for details. + Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals. M Reminder! Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.

Positioning Originals (continued) Positioning Original on Platen Glass Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition. Î1. Raise the document feeder or platen cover.

2. Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner.

The direction of the original should conform to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. ÿ) Reminder! The copy result may not be satisfactory if the original is set in wrong direction. Be sure that the original is set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or using Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 to p. 9-3 for details.

3. Gently close the document feeder or platen cover to prevent the

original from shifting on the glass. Q) Reminder! When selecting Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, AUTO mode in Repeat, or AUTO Layout, DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder. For details on each function, see Section 10.

Positioning Originals (continued) À CAUTION Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured. 3-9

Setting Print Quantity This section describes how to set or change print quantity. To Set Print Quantity The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets. Î1. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. "01105

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel. To Change Print Quantity Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has been already entered. Î1. Press [C (CLEAR QTY)].

2. Enter the correct quantity.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel. 3-10

Setting Job During Warm-up While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy conditions and start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately when the copier engine is ready.

1. Tumonthe power switch of the machine.

Seven types of Warm-up Screens display in succession. HINT See p. 2-16 to p. 2-17 for details on tuning on the power switch.

2. Touch the LCD panel to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic

3. Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.

HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the

platen glass. HINT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. 3-11

Setting Job During Warm-up (continued)

The original for the job will be scanned, and the highlighted FREE JOB folder key will change to SCAN JOB. When scanning is completed, SCAN JOB will change to RESERVE JOB, and the next FREE JOB becomes active. Copier is warming Up Ready to copy reserve/Select [FREE JOB]

6. If setting more than one reserve job, touch the next FREE JOB to

highlight it. Ready to copy reserve

RESERVE JOB 1. ORIGINAL COUNT

LAESERtES 01 0009 LENS MODE Z. Set the desired copying conditions, enter the print quantity, position original(s), then press [START]. Up to 8 reserve jobs can be prepared. Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the Warm-UPp. Q DETAILS + The Job Status Screen allows you to alter the output order of the reserve jobs or to delete the reserve job. See p. 3-38 - p. 3-40. - If all three reserve job keys are used, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll. See p. 3-35 - p. 3-37. CZ HIT To stop printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for details. 3-12

To Stop Scanning/Printing Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.

1. Touch to highlight SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB to be

er MS The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended. Q DETAILS If wrong job is suspended, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu immediately, select the correct job, then press [STOP] to suspend it.

3. Touch EXIT to cancel the job.

All the data of the selected job will be deleted. Q DETAILS To restart the suspended job, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu. 3-13

Selecting Paper Size To select an appropriate paper size for getting your desired copy result, use APS (Automatic Paper Selection), or select paper size manually on the touch screen, as required. To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected. ÿ) Reminder! APS is not available when using non-standard size or wide size paper.

1. Touch to highlight APS under the PAPER SIZE on the Basic

Screen. Position original in the RADF face up

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 Hinr See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CZ Hinrs + See p. 12-9 to p. 12-11 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. + Detectable original sizes can be changed from AB sizes to inch sizes, only A sizes, or AB sizes and inch sizes mixed. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42. + See p. 3-4 to p. 8-9 for details on positioning originals. + Key Operator can deactivate APS when the original is set in the RADF or on the platen glass. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.

Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically selected. 3-14

Selecting Paper Size (continued) Q DETAILS + lfthe appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper. + Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4. See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size. 3-15

Selecting Paper Size (continued) To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) When a paper size is specified on the touch screen, an appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original size detected from the RADF or the platen glass. Q DETAILS Wide paper size can be specified when AMS is in use. In this case, the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be selected automatically.

1. Toucha tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired

paper size. Position original in the RADF face u Selected tray key will be highlighted, and under the LENS MODE the AMS key will also be highlighted. C2 HINT If copying in 1.000 (100%) magnification mode and specifying a paper size, see p. 3-22.

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CZ Hinrs + See p. 12-9 to p. 12-11 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. + See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Scanned image will be printed on the specified paper size in the magnification ratio automatically selected. 3-16

Selecting Paper Size (continued) Q DETAILS + Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4. + See the table below for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and magnification ratio automatically selected. 3-17

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) Use the Multi-sheet bypass tray to copy using special (non-standard) paper. Select the special paper type and weight from the selections previously specified by the Key Operator, then select the size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, as described below. Q) Reminder! Transparency cannot be used on this machine. DO NOT load the transparencies into the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Q DETAILS 8.5”x11”R and B6R sizes (unavailable in Tray 1 to 4) can be used in the Multi- sheet bypass tray. Also, 210-256 g/m? paper can be used in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. C2 Hinrs + To specify the combinations of special paper type and weight to be selected for the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 14-23. + To specify the special paper type, weight and size in Tray 1 to 4 to be used on a regular basis, see p. 14-21 to p. 14-22.

1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray, and load the copy paper.

C2 Hinr See p. 2-26 for further details of loading procedure. For the specifications of paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 12-2 to p. 12-8.

2. Touch the Multi-sheet bypass tray key in the PAPER SIZE area of

the Basic Screen to highlight it. Position original in the RADF face up

The TYPE/SIZE key will appear under the bypass tray key, APS will be deselected, and AMS will be highlighted on the Basic Screen.

The Paper Type/Size popup menu will be displayed. 3-18

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued)

Select the paper type and weight. To select the paper type and weight: Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ORIGINAL COUNT

4 (1069-1626) 5 (1639209) D 1 ( 549 74ç) canca] [ok | Select the desired one out of the six keys on the menu to highlighit it. CZ Hits + Ifthe desired paper type and weight cannot be found on the popup menu, specify it in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-23 for details. + When selecting Tab Paper as the special paper type to copy onto the tabbed paper aang ire tab part, specify the original paper type as Tab Paper on the Special Original popup menu. See p. 9-4 to p. 9-5. If no paper type and weight indication is needed, touch the highlighted key to clear the selection of the six keys. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the bypass tray key of the Basic Screen. Specify the paper size. When using a standard size, touch STD size to highlight it. Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ORIGINAL COUNT | SPECIAL It is auto detect STD inthe case of ñ : [STD size] STD size(special) Non STD size ME When using a special size, specify the paper size as follows. 3-19

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued) 3-20 To select the STD size (special): Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ORIGINAL COUNT 1): [Non STD size ME Touch STD size (special) to display the popup menu, then use arrow keys to scroll to the desired size. To select the Non STD size Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray | SPECIAL |STD size(special)

[CONTROLLER | Touch Non STD size to display the popup menu, touch the vertical or horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrows to scroll to that number. To select the Wide size paper: Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ORIGINAL COUNT [race ros Touch Wide size paper to display the popup menu, use arrow keys to scroll to the desired wide size, then touch Lead edge or Rear edge to

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued) select the paper dimensions corresponding to the wide paper sizes entered. Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ORIGINAL COUNT DÉS y |

41516] Touch Input size to display the Input Size popup menu, touch the vertical or horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrow keys to scroll to that number. The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical/horizontal size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum of 330 mm/487 mm. W) Reminder! When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to specify the actual size of the wide size paper to be loaded. Wide paper size information is not initially input in this machine. Touch OK. The Basic Screen will be restored. The bypass tray key shows the specified size, paper type and the number indicating paper weight, and is highlighted along with the TYPE/SIZE key. Q DETAILS When the STD size (special) or Wide size paper is selected, the size specified on the popup menu will be indicated on the bypass tray key. When Non STD size is selected, the SPECIAL indication will appear instead. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. CZ Hits + See p. 3-4 to p. 8-9 for details on positioning originals. + See p. 9-4 to p. 9-5 for details on positioning non-standard size or tabbed paper originals.

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) When the copier is turned ON, the magnification ratio is set to 1.000 (100%) automatically on the Basic Screen. Follow each procedure described in this section to select the desired magnification ratio. To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.

The initial settings are restored. Check that APS is highlighted to indicate that the 1.000 magnification is selected. CZ HIT The initial settings may be altered by the Key Operator. See p. 14-10.

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

Q DETAILS Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set AMS automatically. In this case, touch 1:1 to highlight it again.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CZ HINT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued) To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode) Use the 8 preset ratios (0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866, 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000) and 3 user preset ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts, or use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 0.001% increments. Specification for Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode © incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift CZ HT See p. 8-5 to p. 8-7 for Vertical/Horizontal Zoom mode.

1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.

The popup menu for changing magnification ratio will be displayed. ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued) To specify a zoom ratio: Fc UD original in the RADF ORIGINAL COUNT 0 RE. D +0 LASrAS jAaras jAa54 (Fan É 2.000$! 141484 1.224h 1.154418 BE DE 0.866] 0.816)L 0. 707]| 0.500) | Sr À 4.000 À 2.000 Touch the Vertical/Horizontal zoom key in the ZOOM area to highlighit it. Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired magnification ratio, then touch OK. The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen. Q DETAILS + The magnification ratio should be a 4-digit number. Start with O if the magnification ratio is under 1.000. If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct ratio. + Use the upper arrow (4) to enlarge, or the lower arrow (Y) to reduce the ratio in 0.001 % increments. + To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL.

3. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

4, Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

5. Position original(s).

CZ HINT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Making Double-Sided Copies (132, 232) The Basic Screen is initially set to 1-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from single-sided originals. Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals scanned from the document feeder or from the platen glass. Using RADF Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or double-sided). Specifications for Double-Sided Copying Using RADF © See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. Q Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Verti./Horiz. mode or Auto mode of Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing Image in Overlay Memory 2-2 Copying —+ Double-sided original Duplex copy Front Back Front Back 1-2 Copying Front Back, — Front Back Front Back Duplex copy Single-sided original

1. Touch 1»2 or 2»2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

(M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 3-25

Making Double-Sided Copies (132, 2-2) (continued)

2. Check the original set direction.

The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it. SPECIAL | SPECIAL SETTING Non STD size Ô Tab paper Ci Touch OKto return to the Basic Screen.

3. Select the binding mode.

Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it. Select Finisher node

Select Finisher node ORIGINAL COUNT ©

Making Double-Sided Copies (12, 2-2) (continued) Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Q DETAILS Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the selected copy mode. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder according to the original direction. C2 Hirs + See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

Press [START]. The machine starts to scan originals, then prints duplex copies when ready for output. Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. CAUTION en the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-27

Making Double-Sided Copies (132, 2-2) (continued) Using Platen Glass Use the platen glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.

3-28 Specification for Double-Sided Copying Using Platen Glass Q Use the Platen store mode. Q See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. Q Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Image Insert, Multi-Page Enlargement, Storing Image in Overlay Memory Check the original set direction. The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it. Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL COUNT … © SPECIAL | SPECIAL SETTING Touch OKto return to the Basic Screen. Select the binding mode. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it. Select Finisher node

Making Double-Sided Copies (12, 2-2) (continued) Q DETAILS Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies nommally. Binding mode Copies | | 1 3

3. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the

original direction, then close the document feeder or platen cover. Be sure to start from the first page. CZ His + See p. 12-9 for paper sizes detectable on the platen glass. + See p. 3-8 for details on positioning originals. + Use Non-Image Area Erase to prevent the black copy marks to be produced when scanning the original with the document feeder or platen cover open. See p. 10-30 to p. 10-31.

4. Touch 12 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

STATUS (COPY MODE] (pal The STORE key will be automatically highlighted on the screen. Q) Reminder! DO NOT press [AUTO RESET] at this point, otherwise the platen mode will be released to disable the copier from scanning the original placed on the platen glass. 3-29

Making Double-Sided Copies (132, 2-2) (continued)

3-30 Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Q DETAILS Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the selected copy mode. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Press [START] to scan. The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into memory. Replace the original on the platen glass with the back side image original, then press [START]. Repeat this step until all originals are scannedl. Q DETAILS + Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. + To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for details. After all originals are scanned, touch STORE to exit the Store mode. STORE will no longer be highlighted. Press [START] to print. Allthe data in memory will be output. Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. CAUTION en the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2)>1) Use RADF and select 2-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided originals. Specification for Single-Sided Copying from Double-Sided Originals © See p. 12-9 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. © Incompatible Conditions: Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booilet selected), Tab Paper, Chapter, Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO Layout, Storing Image in Overlay Memory Front Back Front Back 2-1 Copying — Front Back Front Back Front Back Simplex copy Double-sided original

1. Touch 21 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF E ace up ES 06 Ê STAPLE M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

CZ His + See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2-1) (continued)

The machine starts to scan originals, then prints simplex copies when ready for output. Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. A CAUTION. os en the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-32

To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) Store mode allows you to scan all the originals first, then to start a continuous printing job. Use RADF store mode to scan a large amount of originals. Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder due to thickness, size or condition. These two modes can be used in combination. Q DETAILS RADF tray capacity is 100; however, more than 100 originals can be scanned into memory using RADF store mode. Specification for Store Mode { Incompatible with RADF store mode: Image Insert, Storing image in Overlay Memory

1. Make copying selections, as desired.

W) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF face up

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

Using platen glass: Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page. ÿ) Reminder! When Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat, or AUTO Layout is selected, keep the RADF open throughout the scanning procedure. 3-33

To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) (continued)

3-34 Using RADF: Position originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be loaded. If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them beginning with the block with the first page. Be sure to check the original direction according to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. ÿ) Reminder! The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or using Staple, STITCH&FOLD, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 to p. 9-3 for details. CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Press [START] to scan. Q DETAILS + Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all originals are scanned. + Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. + To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-13 for details. C2 Hinr See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10 if memory overflow occurs. Should memory overilow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. STORE will no longer be highlighted. Press [START]. Allthe data in memory will be output. Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. A AUTION _ en the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately. Specifications for Reserve © Job settings: Max. 8 (current job plus 7 reserve jobs) 9 When the current job is in Store mode, Image Insert, or Dual Page, the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job. © incompatible Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof copy, Storing image in Overlay Memory Î1. Press [START] to start scanning/printing for the current job. FREE JOB will become active to show that the reserve job setting is now available. Copying in progress [ES CONTROLLER] COLOUR MODE) F SINGLE COLOUR É BLACK COLOUR AUTO

2. Touch FREE JOB to highlight it.

The Reserve Job Setting Screen will be displayed. Press START to scan originals Please press to STORE by scanning complete

RESERVE JOB 1 ORIGINAL COUNT 50

On the Reserve Job Setting Screen, all keys on the LCD and control panel will function for the reserve job.

3. Select copy conditions for the reserve job, as desired.

CZ HIT When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the PRINT or SCAN JOB key on the Basic Screen will change to JAM or ADD PAPER key. See p. 5-6 to p. 5-8. 3-35

To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) (continued) 4, Position original(s) after completing the scan for the current job.

3-36 CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Q DETAILS To cancel the reserve job, touch STATUS on the Basic Screen to display the Job Status Screen. See p. 3-38 to p. 3-40 for details. Press [START] to start scanning for the reserve job. Copying in progress [ES CONTROLLER] É PRINT

Up to 8 jobs (current job included) can be set. Q DETAILS When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job. To set the fourth copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another three reserve job settings (04-06) will be available. Copying in progress CO Ready to copy reserve/Select [FREE JOB] RESERVE JOB 3 NAL COUNT 34 ri er mme se JL > Ja > ML crarue FUNCTION- FTINAGE ADJUÈT.

To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) (continued) To set the seventh copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another two reserve job settings (07-08) will be available. Copying in progress Ready to copy reserve/Select [FREE JOB]

RE: EJOE 8 AL COUNT 50

IT co FREE 40D Q DETAILS The number of reserve jobs including current job will be indicated in the middle of the message area. When completed, the Basic Screen for the current printing job will be restored. To scroll to the next/previous screen, touch the arrow keys displayed at the right side of the folder keys. CZ HIT When trouble occurs on a reserve job which is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will blink. See p. 5-6 to p. 5-8. Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing the current job. CAUTI À, A TION, / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-37

To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions. + Confirm machine status + Change order of reserve job + Delete reserve job + View previous job list + View noncomplete job list Q DETAILS Not only the copy reserve jobs but the print jobs made in Printer mode can also be checked and controlled on this screen.

1. Touch STATUS on the Basic Screen.

The Job Status Screen will be displayed. Check the current status of the machine. CZ HINT See p. 3-40 for details of the screen.

2. Perform the desired setting on the screen.

MEMORY 100 STATUS TOTAL PAGE(S) PAGE(S) TO 60 À MINUTE(S)TO GO} PRINTING PRINTER RESERVE 1 0 re COPIER RESERVE 20 ##x RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST #xx 1 ##x RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST ##x To change the order of reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB PRIORITY. The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress. DETAILS If more than six jobs are entered, use the page down arrow key at the lower left comer of the screen to scroll to the desired job. To clear reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB CLEAR. Touch YES to clear the highlighted reserve job, or NOto cancel. TOTAL PAGES) 3-38

To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) (continued) To check user name (print jobs only): Touch USER NAME CHECK to display the User Name Check Screen. Check the user name indicated on the right side of the job number and operation mode. Touch OKto return to the Job Status Screen. To display previous job Touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to display the Previous Job List Screen. Touch [#) to scroll to the next page. Up to 16 previous jobs (4 pages) can be displayed.

To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) (continued) Contents of Job Status Screen NO. : Displays the No. (01-99) for each job assigned to the machine. MODE: Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Three modes are listed below. COPIER PRINTER SCANNER STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job. READY : Ready to use in each mode INTERRUPT : Interrupting the previous job ERROR : Error in each mode PRINTING : Printing in each mode NO PAPER _ : No paper in copy/print mode STOP : Stop in each mode RESERVE _ : Ready to reserve JAM : Jam in each mode TOTAL PAGE(s): DAD > the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to

PAGE(s) TO GO: Displays the remaining copy count of the job. 0 to 9999 (The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 99991.) Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job. Exceeding 999 minutes: 9991 Shorter than 1 minute: <1 Other: The following message will be displayed on the bar when the reserved job does not exist.

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher This section describes the output modes for a copier without the Finisher. The Non-sort mode is initially selected.

Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets normally. Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90° upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R. Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs grouped sets normally. Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90° upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R. Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit face up on the exit tray. mere 1 = Example: 3-set copies Face down Face down Face down Face down non-sort (default) rotation sort group rotation group Face up Face up Face up Face up non-sort rotation sort group rotation group FER 3-41

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued) Specification for Output Modes without Finisher © Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering) © Incompatible with Rotation Group mode: Proof Copy, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size (FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering), Overlay © Incompatible with Rotation Sort mode: Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase Î1. Load copy paper. When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same paper size into two trays in different orientation. ÿ) Reminder! + Do not release the Rotation function. + When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Select the desired output mode.

To select Face down non-sort mode: Confirm that OUTPUT MENU is not highlighted on the Basic Screen. Position original in the RADF face up

OÉE, C2 nr Face down non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 14-10. To select Group, Rotation group, Rotation sort or Face up mode: Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired mode key to highlight it. To use Face up mode in combination, simply touch FACE UP to highlight it. 3-42

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued) Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored with the output icon indicating the Output mode currently selected. Q DETAILS Touch CANCEL on the Output Mode popup menu to restore the previous setting. Touch RECALL STANDARD to restore the initial setting. HINT See the next page for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. Q) Reminder! The exit tray capacity is 120 sheets. Be sure that the capacity is not exceeded. CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Press [START]. Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. À CAUTION When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandied paper will occur. 3-43

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued) Q DETAILS Output Icons on the Basic Screen Face Down Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher Finisher FS-115/215 is equipped with a primary (main) and a secondary (sub) exit trays. Without using any optional equipment, each exit tray provides the output modes as described below. Primay (Main) Tray: 1 Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets. Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set offset by 30mm upon exit. thick) can be stapled.

3 Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Up to 50 sheets (or within 5mm

Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30mm upon exit. Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit face up on the exit tray. Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets

2staples ? Offset by 30mm DES 1 oblique staple Group Offset by 30mm 3-45

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued) Secondary (Sub) Tray: 1 Face down non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face down, without offsetting the sorted sets. 2 Face down group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face down, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit. 3 Face up non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face up, without offsetting the sorted sets. 4 Face up group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face up, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit. Example: Make 3 copied sets SE SE Le SE

Face down Face down Face up Face up non-sort group non-sort group The copier is initially set to output to Primary (main) tray in Sort mode. Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired. CZ HIT See Section 8 for the output modes using Finisher options. Specification for Output Modes with Finisher © Incompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, © Incompatible with Staple mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming ÿ) Reminder! Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple mode may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets. © Incompatible with Group mode: 12 or 22 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Repeat 3-46

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)

© Incompatible with Group using Secondary (sub) tray: 12 or 22 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Punch, Cover sheet feeding, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Repeat © Incompatible with Face Up exit: 12 or 22 mode using platen glass, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Cover sheet feeding Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. Check that the Sort mode icon is displayed and the OUTPUT MENU key is highlighted in the OUTPUT area. CZ HT Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 14-10. Select the desired output mode. To set output to the Primary (main) tray (except Staple): proceed to the next step. To set Staple mode: proceed to step 4. To set output to the Secondary (sub) tray: proceed to step 5. Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it. To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys in the OUTPUT<MAIN TRAY> area. To select Sort mode, touch SORT to highlight it. To select Group mode, touch GROUP io highlight it. To select Face up mode, touch FACE UPin the SURFACE area to highlight it. The Face up mode is compatible with Non-sort, Sort and Group modes. Q) Reminder! Using Face up mode and Non-sort or Sort mode in combination, the sorted copies will be output in the reverse order of the originals. Select Finisher node ORIGINAL COUNT ©

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)

4. Toset Staple-sort mode:

(1) Touch STAPLE on the Basic Screen to highlight it. 3-48 [EcoNTROLLER | Position original in the RADF face up

OUTPUT PLI GÉE, {STORE The staple position icon will be displayed in the output icon area. To change the staple position, proceed to the next step. Proceed to step (3), ifthe present setting is desired. (2) Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, touch the desired staple position key, then touch OK. Select Finisher node ORIGINAL COUNT. © The Basic Screen will be restored, with the selected staple position icon displayed. CZ HIT When making double-sided copies, select the desired binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu. See p. 3-52 for details of the binding mode. Staple position Binding mode + CO + | [| es 11.18 sl |: 11.18 et) (> | + Lo À L 2 3 3 3

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)

(3) Check the original set direction with the Original direction icon at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, touch the desired original set direction key, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select condition to scan originals

To select Face down non-sort mode, deselect both FACE UP and GROUP. To select Face up non-sort mode, touch FACE UP to highlight it. To select Face down group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it. To select Face up group mode, touch FACE UP and GROUP to highlight them. Touch OK to restore the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted, and the output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed in the OUTPUT area. CZ HIT See p. 3-50 for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. ÿ) Reminder! See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded. 3-49

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued) CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original(s).

C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Q DETAILS Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-13 for details. W) Reminder! Finisher primary (main) tray of Finisher FS-115/215 gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher. À CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandied paper will occur. Q DETAILS Output Icons on the Basic Screen Primary (Main) tray: Face down Non-sort Sort (offset) Group (offset)

2. Touch to highlight the desired binding mode key.

• SECTION Helpful Functions How to Use Helpful Functions Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) p. 4
• -2 Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) p. 4
• -4 Interrupt Copying 4-8 Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) p. 4
• -11 Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)… 4-14 Recalling Previous Job Settings -15 Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) …. 4-16 p. 4

Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) Use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections. Copying conditions using Store mode + Booklet + Sheet/Cover Insertion * Image Insert + Chapter - Dual Page + Combination -+ Program Job Specifications for Proof Copy © Proof copy is available when using RADF or Platen store mode for multiple originals. © Proof copy is not compatible with Group or Rotation group output mode.

1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired

print quantity. (n Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Position original(s).

CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

3. Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel.

Bit Fes Equ/ PRINT SCAN = POWER

A sample copy will be output, and the Check Screen will be displayed. Q DETAILS + Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory. + You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof copying.

Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) (continued) GES

CHECK MODE E BASIC MODE }

Copy Quantity | 1 Main tray EEE] MonoColour (Magenta ) Face up RODSr SG tre Special Fapér. Fipe Norma Ce) En ET If the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to step 5. If any setting changes are required, refer to p. 4-6 under the next heading. Repeat proof copying until the copy result becomes satisfactory. Change the print quantity, as required. Q DETAILS Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the Basic Screen reaches zero. If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen. Press [START]. If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the sample sets. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before starting print operation. In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections. Copying conditions using Store mode + Booklet + Sheet/Cover insertion * Image insert + Chapter - Dual Page + Combination - Program job Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy © Proof copy is available when using RADF, or Platen store mode for multiple originals. © Proof copy cannot be used for testing the Userset density. © Proof copy is unavailable with Group output mode.

1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired

print quantity. (n Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Position original(s).

C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

3. Press [CHECK] on the control panel.

Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) (continued)

1 Main tray . E MonoColour (Magenta ) Face up

CHECK move L [D ve CES 4, (je M (Gite cran [nerf veLLo eur Shodon| 100 u [ie [ro Migrene tn [ru | beno [ion [an roc Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the next screen in order as shown above. Touching the upper arrow key will resume the previous screen. Touch TrayConfirm to display the Tray Setting Check Screen. Verify all the settings made for the current job. - If settings are OK, proceed to step 8. - If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 6.

• 1f making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to the next step. - If releasing any setting from the Check Screen, proceed to step 5.

Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) (continued)

To change the settings: Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it. Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition cannot be changed from the Check Screen. Touch CHANGE SETTING. The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying condition selected. Q DETAILS + Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen. + Selecting a Special Original Mode key will display the Special Original popup menu. + Selecting an Image Adjust Mode key will display the Change Image Adjustment Setting Screen. When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting the mode key will jump to that screen. + Selecting an Application Mode key will display the Change Application Selection Screen. When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 10-2 for details. + CHANGE SETTING will not function for the following application functions, however they can be released by touching RELEASE SETTING: Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, AUTO Layout, Overlay. Change the setting as desired, then restore the Check Screen to return to the checking steps. From the Basic Screen, press [CHECK] to return to the Check Screen. From the Special Original popup menu, Change Image Adjustment Setting Screen or Change Application Selection Screen, touch OK'to return to the Check Screen. +. When making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 6. *__ To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 8. To release the settings: Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it, then touch RELEASE SETTING. The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen.

<y Le] 10. 0mm FT Li [11 O.Omm Stamp/Over lay _|Rees A Crauconiem JEEANRE JCERERE CE ex] Touch YES to cancel the function, or NO to restore. + If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step. + __ To start printing, proceed to step 8.

Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) (continued)

Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY on the Check Screen. A sample copy will be output. Q DETAILS + Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory. + You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof copying.

CHECK MODE E BASIC MODE }

Copy Quant ity ( fExit tray Main tray ii Game |] MonoColour (Magenta ) Face up Nora!

+ When the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to the next step. + _ When any setting change is required, return to step 4, then repeat proof copying, as required. If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [STOP] to delete all the data in memory, then press [AUTO RESET] to restart the job setting. Change the print quantity, as required. Q DETAILS Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the Basic Screen reaches zero. (Note that the print quantity amount on the Check Screen does not change.) If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen. Press [START]. If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the sample sets. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Interrupt Copying Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the Basic Screen displays. Interrupt copying is available when the copier is performing the following operations: + Continuously printing the image stored in memory + Scanning the originals into memory + Scanning the originals into memory in Reserve mode while printing CZ HIT If desired, Key Operator can change the timing to stop current machine operation for interrupt copying. Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing selected. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42. Specification for Interrupt Mode © The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions: The Basic Screen is not displayed. Overlay Memory is in use. The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs. © Incompatible: 2» 1, 2»2, Applications, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original Î1. Press [INTERRUPT] on the control panel. The [INTERRUPT] LED turns on and all JOB indicators on the Basic Screen change to INTERRUPT. Position original in the RADF face up

PAPER SIZE CZ HIT The timing to enter the Interrupt mode varies according to the job in progress on the machine when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. See the following page.

Interrupt Copying (continued)

Q DETAILS In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning the reserve job originals clears the settings selected for the reserve job. For details of Reserve mode, see p. 3-35 to p. 3-37. Set copy conditions, as desired. The initial settings in Interrupt mode are as follows. Colour Mode _ : Full Colour Copy Mode :1»1 RADF : ON AE : ON Lens Mode : 1.000 (100%) APS : ON Print Quantity :1 Finisher : Main Tray in Sort mode Q DETAILS Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if present. Position original(s). C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Press [START] to start the interrupt copying. Q DETAILS When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt copying, the information displayed reflects the initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information. When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again. The [INTERRUPT] LED turns out and the INTERRUPT indicator on the Basic Screen returns to the JOB indicators. The settings of the initial job will be restored on the Basic Screen. Press [START] to resume copying. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Interrupt Copying (continued)

Q DETAILS For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by the [INTERRUPT] LED conditions described below. + Collectively printing image stored in memory The LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed. Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. + Scanning originals into memory The LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the document feeder. Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. + Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode The LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job, scans all originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one set of the Reserved job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode.

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) Use Job Store to store up to 80 frequently used copy job settings, which can be recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names. Specifications for Job Memory © All copying functions can be selected. © Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory.

1. Make job selections from the Basic Screen and/or

Application Selection Screen. (n Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.

The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)

Copy Quant ity fExit tray Main tray : 5 MonoColour (Magenta ) Face up Nora!

Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the following pages. Check that the selections made in step 1 are correcily entered. Q DETAILS If any correction is required, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen. Make new selections, then restart the Job Store operation from step 2. Touch OK. The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To suspend the storing job after step 6, press [ AUTO RESET]. Job Memory mode will be cancelled, and the Basic Screen will return from any screen. Touch to highlight one of the keys numbered from 1-30 to store the job under that number. Job store mode Locked job can'tbe overwritten

SERRE SOS The screen displays 15 job number keys. The arrow key at the lower left corner can be used to scroll to the next/previous page. A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key, and a named job Without a lock icon ( f) displayed can be overwritten. The key with a lock icon (à) displayed is locked and cannot be selected. CZ HIT To lock or unlock a job, and to delete a locked job, see p. 14-20.

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued) Q DETAILS If you wish to cancel the job number selection, touch CANCEL to restore the Basic Screen, which displays the settings made in step 1. If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO RESET].

The Job Name Registration Screen will be displayed. Use max 16 characters to nane job Louve] Co

8. Enter a job name.

Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered, then enter the correct job name. Q DETAILS If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch OK. The key displays 16 asterisks (*) in place of a name. When changing the name of a job previously stored, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete the previous name, then enter the new name.

The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored. Check that the job name has been correctily entered.

10. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.

4-14 Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel. The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed. Touch to highlight a job number key to select a job you want to recall. Job recall mode OC SR “En os = cs

The screen displays 15 job number keys. If required, scroll to the next page With the arrow key to reach the desired job number key (16-30). If desired, touch JOB CHECK. The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings.

CHECK MODE E BASIC MODE }

1 Main tray 1-1 5 MonoColour (Magenta ) Face up Normal

Touch OK. The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Basic Screen. To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen. Position original(s), then press [START] to print.

Recalling Previous Job Settings Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job’s settings. Q DETAILS + Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous job settings. Non-complete job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled, even if the setting operations have been made last. + The previous job settings can be recalled, even after the machine power is turned off then on. Î1. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel. The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.

SES EC The JOB CHECK key will be displayed between STORE and PRE-JOB RECALL onthe screen Touch JOB CHECK to display the Job Check Screen. Check the settings of the previous output job. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. The settings of the previous output job is recalled on the screen. Change the settings recalled on the screen, if desired. D OO RS S When all settings are acceptable, position original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass, then press [START]. 4-15

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) The Help Screen provides you with the information about the current screen mode and about setting procedures. Help mode can be accessed from any screen except Job Memory and Key Operator Screens. Help mode provides two types of Help Screens according to the current screen mode: 1 Help Screen accessed from Basic Screen . 2 Help Screen accessed from screens other than Basic Screen To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen

TRIMMER PAPER SUPPLY Pi PAPER SUPPLY I IE 0000000000000000 = Key operator mode STAPLE SUPPLY provides information on replacing staple cartridge. PUNCH provides information on emptying waste basket. TRIMMER provides information on emptying waste basket. RADF provides information on positioning originals in the document feeder. TONER SUPPLY provides information on adding toner. PAPER SUPPLY provides information on loading paper in each tray. HELP MENU displays the Help Menu Screen which provides a list of all of the copier functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic.

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued) + PANEL CONTRAST|_( | displays the screen to adjust the contrast of the LCD panel. _ *_ Toner Recovery box | «#1 | provides information on exchanging the toner recovery box. + _ FOR ASSISTANCE displays the extension number of the Key Operator. + TELEPHONE/FAX displays the phone/fax number of your service centre. Q DETAILS + Touch on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page. Touch to return to the previous page. + Touch KEY OPERATOR MODE to enter the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-2.

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued) To Display Help Screen from Other Screens

1. While in any screen other than the Basic Screen, press

The Help Screen displays to provide the information about the current screen mode and setting procedures.

The screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP] will be restored.

When “Call for Service” Message ls Displayed A “Call for Service” message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service representative. The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of your service representative. Please call service Report code 00-00

À CAUTION When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to contact your service representative immediately by following the procedure below.

1. Make note of the Report code No. indicated in the second

line of the message area. CZ HINT If your machine uses the Remote Diagnostics option and is automatically monitored by your service representative, the Key Operator can call for service using the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-44. ÿ) Reminder! After calling for service using the Key Operator setting, be sure to turn OFF the power switch immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.

2. Turn OFF the power switch.

When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed (continued)

3. Unplug the machine.

4. Contact your service representative and report the condition and

code No. Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.

1. Ifthe limited use of the copier is available, the following

Please switch ON/OFF E 18-2 Make note of the Report code No.

3. Turn OFF then ON the power switch.

A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the machine (ex. Tray 2). À CAUTION EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED.

Clearing Mishandied Paper When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). Copying operation cannot be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared. Graphic Illustration key Touch to display the subsequent screens for the disposal action. Hishandled paper . . Please renove a paper following a guide Jlustaion CRE cn “Open Tray 4 front door “Open vertical conveyance door and remove paper

Paper jam position display Numbers flashing or lighting Message area indicate the jammed positions. An action will be displayed. Q DETAILS The above screen displays all the jam numbers for the sake of explanation. Actually a few numbers appear when a paper misfeed occurs.

1. Touch Graphic Illustration on the screen.

The screenillustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed. W) Reminder! Before performing the clearing procedure, see p. 1-2 for the caution label locations inside the machine.

2. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

Touch (# ] on the screen, if provided, to go to the next page of a series of illustrations. ÿ) Reminder! When removing mishandied paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine.

3. When completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the screen displays the next disposal procedure in the message area and the location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the locations are cleared. 5-4

Clearing Mishandled Paper (continued) À WARNING The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area. À CAUTION The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCHI. À CAUTION Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured. À CAUTION DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured.

When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) If a misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job, SCAN or PRINT JOB folder key on the Basic Screen will change to flashing JAM JOB. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print/scan job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash. Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.

Display the Jam Position Screen. Touch JAM JOB. The Jam Position Screen will be displayed. When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the JAM JOB folder key, then touch it to display the Jam Position Screen. Copying in progress Ready to y reserv lect [FREE JOB]

When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) (continued)

Touch Graphic Illustration. Hishandled paper . . Please renove a paper following a guide Illustration CRE cn “Open Tray 4 front door “Open vertical conveyance door and remove paper The screenillustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed. C2 Hnr See p. 5-4 to p. 5-5 for details on clearing procedure. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper. When all procedures are completed, the Basic Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS JAM JOB has changed to STOP, and the settings for the current printing job are displayed on the screen. Press [START]. The scan/print job will resume. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting. À WARNING The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area. À CAUTION The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCHI. À CAUTION Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured. À CAUTION DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured.

When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a reserve job, PRINT JOB on the Basic Screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash. Press START to scan originals Please press to STORE by scanning complete

Follow the procedure below to continue the copying operation.

1. Display the Basic Screen for the print job in progress.

Touch ADD PAPER. The Basic Screen for the print job will be displayed. When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the ADD PAPER folder key, then touch it to display the Basic Screen for the print job. Copying in progress

STATUS FUNCTION ADJUST

2. Check the flashing tray key, then supply that empty tray with copy

paper. When paper supply is completed, ADD PAPER changes to STOP. CZ HIT See p. 2-22 to p. 2-82 for details on loading paper.

The print job will resume.

4. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.

When “Memory Full” Message ls Displayed (Memory Overflow) In certain modes, this printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient and smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected. To handle the Memory overflow condition while performing a job, take the appropriate action described below. These actions enable you to continue the job or suspend the job. Q DETAILS Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine. Memory Overflow in Current Job When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job, the machine stops immediately, and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two available options.

FTINAGE ADJUÈT. This JOB is stopped L N Scan is stopped, scanned data is output STAPLE Q DETAILS Ifthe job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear. -* To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job, touch JOB STOP. + To give up further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory, touch SCAN STOP.

When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) (continued) Memory Overflow in Reserve Job When memory overflow occurs during the reserve operation, CONTINUE also appears on the active screen. In this case, the machine will not stop until all the jobs on standby for printing are completed. Copying in progress

Conrinue] If memory is free, scan is continued STORE Q DETAILS If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear.

• To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job, touch JOB STOP. - To give up further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last reserve job, touch SCAN STOP. + To continue scanning the last reserve job, touch CONTINUE as the current printing job gradually enables memory for new data. 5-10

When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen will be displayed. Please switch OFF/ON E12-34 Please turn the power OFF and ON If SC still occurs, call service centre Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.

1. Turn OFF the power switch.

2. Wait about 10 seconds.

3. Turn ON the power switch.

Troubleshooting Tips COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON Fully insert paper trays. Close RADF. Close Front doors of main body. Close Finisher door. Check to be sure main power switch is ON. Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT

Manually adjust copy density to darker density. Check toner indicator and add toner, if required. Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required. Check the Density shift.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK

Manually adjust copy density to lighter density. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required. Check the Density shift. COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied. Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean. Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area. Check density indicator and lighten if required.

COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING

Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray capacity.

COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF

Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.

MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED

Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification. Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce & Shift.

DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED

Fully close RADF, then select Duplex mode again. COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING [START] Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected. Close document cover firmly. Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body completely. Close Finisher door completely. Check to see if the message “Please close stacker cover of Trimmer” is displayed. Close Trimmer stacker cover or front door completely. 5-12

Troubleshooting Tips (continued) COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.

COPY QUALITY IS POOR

Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary. THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight. Be sure originals are not stapled. Align originals evenly in the RADF. Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals. COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED Be sure copy paper is inserted straight. USING EKC, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed. Contact Key Operator to reset limit.

FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE

Touch OUTPUT MENU. Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required. Properly close finisher door. RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER [AUTO RESET] IS PRESSED Fully close RADF.

RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING

The document feeder is ready to accept originals. Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START].

ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED

Nevw toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner. CALL FOR PMIS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.

APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE

Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals. IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size; otherwise, the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink. THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL Check with the Key Operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed. 5-13

Troubleshooting Tips (continued)

“PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL”

This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the platen glass. Select paper size and press [START]. 1.000 magnification will be selected automatically. If this message continues to display after selecting paper size, select 1.000 magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [START]. lf desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.000 magnification in this situation. SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion. Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd. FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait style).

COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS

Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down.

USING PUNCH, COPIES CANNOT BE PUNCHED

Check to see if the message “Waste basket of Punching kit is full” is displayed. Empty the waste basket. COPIES CANNOT BE STAPLED OR PUNCHED IN POSITION Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy paper in the paper tray to be used. Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down.

USING TRIMMER, COPIES CANNOT BE TRIMMED

Check to see if the message “Waste basket of Trimmer is full” is displayed. Empty the waste basket. 5-14

SECTION Machine Specifications Main Body & Option Specifications Main Body Specifications .…............................................ 6-2 Option Specifications... 6-4

Main Body Specifications Main Body Name: Type: Transfer method: Platen glass: Light-sensitive unit: Light source: Developing method: Fixing method: Density adjustment: Magnification ratio: Copy paper: Copying speed: Continuous copying: Types of original: Original size: Copy size: Paper supply method: Warm-up time: First copy time: Konica 8050 Console type indirect electrostatic method Fixed OPC Xenon lamp Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing Heat roller Automatic and manual (9 steps) 114+10% Enlargement: 1:1.154 (115.4 %), 1:1.224 (122.4 %), 1:1.414 (141.4 %), 1:2.000 (200 %) Reduction: 1:0.866 (86.6 %), 1:0.816 (81.6 %), 1:0.707 (70.7 %), 1:0.500 (50 %) Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio: 25 % to 400 % in 1 % increments Plain paper: 64 to 256 g/m? Special paper: Tab, 3-hole

• Set offset master, intermediate paper, or labels one sheet each on Multi-sheet bypass tray.
• Full-Image Area function is not provided on this machine. Tray 1, 2, 3 (universal); 500 sheets (90 g/m?) Tray 4 (LOT) (universal); 2,500 sheets (90 g/m?) (LT-211 option) Multi-sheet bypass tray; 250 sheets (90 g/m?) Approx. 7 minutes (20°C 50 %RH, 230 V) Approx. 5.2 seconds (A4) in Black mode Approx. 6.9 seconds (A4) in Full colour/Single colour mode These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-2

Main Body Specifications (continued) Power: AC 230 V / 50 Hz (This equipment selects the correct voltage automatically.) Power consumption: 3.4 KW max. (with option) Sound power level: 78 dB max. (with option) Weight: Approx. 313 kg (main body) + 1.6 kg w/Platen cover (CV-131) + 14.5 kg WRADF + 56 kg w/Finisher (FS-115) + 66 kg w/Finisher (FS-215) + 10.5 kg w/Cover sheet feeder (PI-110) +3 kg w/Punching kit (PK-120) + 40 kg w/LCT (LT-211) + 68 kg w/Trimmer unit (TU-109) Size: 760 (W) x 889 (D) x 1179 (H) mm (main body + RADF) 2213 (W) x 889 (D) x 1179 (H) mm (main body + RADF + FS-115 + LT-211) 3162 (W) x 889 (D) x 1179 (H) mm (main body + RADF + FS-215 + TU-109 + LT-211) Effective size*: 1010 (W) x 979 (D) mm (main body + RADF) 2573 (W) x 979 (D) mm (main body + RADF + FS-215 + LT-211)

• Effective size is dimensions required when the Multi-sheet bypass tray is opened. These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-3

Option Specifications RADF (DF-319) Function: Type of original: Original size: Original capacity: Original insertion: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically 35 g/m? - 200 g/m? in Simplex mode (Use Thin mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL for 35 g/m? - 49 g/m°? paper) 50 g/m? - 200 g/m° in Duplex mode (Use Thick mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL for 129 g/m? - 200 g/m? paper) Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm (11.7"x17") Min. 128 mm x 139.7 mm (5.0"x5.5") A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, AR, 11"x17", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11" 100 sheets max. (90 g/m2) Automatic feed at a time 588 (W) x 519 (D) x 135 (H) mm Approx. 14.5 kg Supply from main body FS-115/215 In-Bin Stapler Finisher Type: Sorting system: Paper sizes: Paper type: Number of stapled sheet: Staple cartridge: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Offset catch tray Sorting by shifting (30 +2 mm) (copies are delivered face down) A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, 13"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" *_A4R/8.5"x11"R only in Three-Fold mode.

• Secondary (sub) tray is also available for exiting Non STD size paper. 50 g/m? - 256 g/m° paper 60 g/m? - 90 g/m? in Three-Fold mode Special (Label, Tab, 4-holes) 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (90 g/m? paper) 5,000 staples 656 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm Approx. 55 kg (FS-115) / 65 kg (FS-215) Supply from main body These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-4

Option Specifications (continued) PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder Function: Configuration: Types of paper: Paper sizes: Stack capacity: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Paper feed into Finisher FS-115/215 2 trays (upper/lower) 50 to 256 g/m? paper Upper tray A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" Lower tray AS, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5SR, A5, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", and those Wide sizes (max. 314 mm x 445 mm) 200 sheets max. or 30 mm or less (200 g/m? paper) 511 (W) x 620 (D) x 220 (H) mm Approx. 10.5 kg Supply from finisher TU-109 Trimmer Unit Function: Types of paper: Paper sizes: Number of trimmed sheet: Trimming width: Stack capacity: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Trimming the end of booklet 64 to 90 g/m? paper One cover paper only (91 to 256 g/m° paper) A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R 8 sheets max. in Fold mode 16 sheets max. using 90 g/m? paper only in Stitch&Fold mode 15 sheets max. with a cover in Stitch&Fold mode 10 mm max. Approx. 512 sheets max. 100 sets max of 2-5-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.) 50 sets max. of 6-10-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.) 32 sets max. of 11-16-sheet-folded booklet (512 sheets max.) 1117 (W) x 604 (D) x 562 (H) mm Approx. 68 kg Supply from outlet These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Option Specifications (continued) PK-120 Punching Kit Function: Punching file holes in copies Number of punch holes: 4 Hole diameter: 6.5 mm + 0.5 mm Hole pitch: 80 mm + 0.5 mm Paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 11"x17", 8.5"x11" Types of paper: 50 g/m? - 162 g/m° paper Dimensions: 68 (W) x 442 (D) x 120 (H) mm Weight: Approx. 2 kg Power source: Supply from finisher LT-211 Large Capacity Tray Function: Paper feed into main body Paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 18"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", and those Wide sizes Types of paper: 64 g/m? - 105 g/m° paper Thick: 106 g/m° - 256 g/m? paper Capacity: 4,000 sheets Dimensions: 720 (W) x 639 (D) x 485 (H) mm Weight: Approx. 40 kg Power source: Supply from main body Memory Unit MU-412: 256 MB (available one for each colour) Others Platen Cover (CV-131) Trimmer Relay Kit (TU-109A Kit) Image Processor (IP-901) Hard Disk Drive (HD-106) Key Counter These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-6

SECTION Colour Image Adjustment About Colours….............................…........... 7-2 Colour Copy Quality... 7-4 Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density) …. 7-15 Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) . 7-19 Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment).. 7-24 Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) 7-26 Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode ….. 7-29 Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) … 7-32 Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original) …. 7-34

About Colours RGB and CMYK Models Have you ever wondered why the world surrounding us appears coloured to our eyes? Light is electromagnetic waves with wavelengths between about 380 - 780 nm, also called visible rays. The wavelengths of visible rays can be separated into the rainbow colours violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red, from the shortest wavelength in order. When all the wavelengths of the visible rays strike your eye at the same time, white colour is perceived. We see the objects in colour because they reflect or transmit visible light of different wavelengths or frequencies. (m;

40-10 10-12 400, À - = 380: 10714 Visible rays Electromagnetic wave The colours separated from visible light are called primary colours. Primary colours cannot be produced from other colours. These colours, however, can be combined to make up any other colour (colour mixture). The colour mixture provides two different types, three primary colours of light and three primary colours of pigment. The three primary colours of light are called additive colour mixture, and the more colours are added, the brighter it will be. Mixing red (R), green (G), and blue (B) coloured lights, various colours can be created. The three primary colours of pigment are called subtractive colour mixture, and the more colours are added, the darker it will be. Various colours can be created by mixing cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) pigments (such as ink or toner), however, black (K) is actually used as the fourth colour in addition to the three primary pigments. Three primary colors of light Three primary colors of pigment

About Colours (continued) HSB Model This model is based on the human perception of colour. When our eyes perceive colours in objects, we receive the information not only on the colour itself (reddish, bluish, etc.) but the brightness (rather bright, dark, etc.) and the purity (vivid, dull, etc.) of the colour. The colour perception (reddish, bluish, etc.) is defined as hue (H). The strength or purity of the colour is defined as saturation (S), and the lightness or darkness of the colour is defined as brightness (B). The above three elements are called the three attributes of colour. With these three attributes, the Munsell colour system has been created to describe colours in a three-dimensional space. Brightness

Colour Copy Quality Modifying Colours As mentioned above, colours can be reproduced by mixing four pigments, the three primary colours cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). To enhance the copy quality, this machine allows you to modify colours by means of the three attributes of colour based upon the human eye and perception. The following methods are provided: Adjust the density of the whole image. Density —4 +4

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue Saturation

7-6 Q DETAILS The hue adjustment leads the colour of the image to another colour adjacent inthe eu circle of yellow (Y), red (R), magenta (M), blue (B), cyan (C), and green (G). Colour Copy Quality (continued) Brightness

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Change the hue by varying the image’s red (R), green (G), and blue (B) individually or mutually. Original Red “75 Green

7-8 Colour Copy Quality (continued) Blue

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Change the hue by varying the image's cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) individually or mutually. Cyan Magenta 7-9

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Yellow Black 7-10

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Reproducing Images This machine provides two methods for reproducing images. The Dither (Error Diffustion) method uses small dots (600 dots per inch) to reproduce the image. This method is appropriate for text originals. The Screen method also provides two methods, Line Screen and Dot Screen. The Line Screen uses many halftone lines, like scanning lines of a television, while Dot Screen uses small dots to reproduce the image. The Screen image data requires much memory, though it provides fine quality in reproducing the scanned photographic image. Dot screen Black images Colour images Line screen Black images Colour images Line

Colour Copy Quality (continued) What Is Image Detection? In many cases, originals include both photo and text. Although the text is normally printed in black, a colour printer inevitably uses not only the black toner but cyan, magenta, and yellow in layers to reproduce the black text. Using the Screen method, the colour printer may add colours in large or bold characters to reproduce the text in the same way as the photo. While scanning such originals, this machine detects and determines the photo portion and text area, so that the text area should be reproduced in single colour and the photo portion in full colour. This function also allows you to obtain the optimum print results by modifying the standard for image detection according to the character size of the text or its proportion in the whole original. Middle Solid Detected as text 7-12

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Applying Filters In addition to the colour adjustment and image reproduction methods, this machine allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality. Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness) Sharpness Original —4 +4 Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast) Contrast

Colour Copy Quality (continued) Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode) Gloss mode Original Improving Colour Copy Quality To improve the colour copy quality, this machine provides the three types of adjustment methods: Colour adjustment, Selecting the image reproduction method and its adjustment, and other adjustments. The colour adjustment is performed by varying the level of pigments in RGB model or CMYK model, or by modifying the hue, saturation, and brighiness of the image. To reproduce the copy image, select one of the two methods, Line Screen and Dot Screen. The Image Detection function will help in selecting the most appropriate method for each part of the original to make the copies of scanned image. For further improvement, use Copy Density or apply filters for Sharpness, Contrast, and Gloss Mode. 7-14

Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background{Copy Density) Automatic Exposure (AË) operates to detect the density level of the original image while scanning, and automatically selects the appropriate density for the copy. CZ HT The density to be selected automatically using AË can be adjusted on the machine. See “[20] AE Adjustment” in the Key Operator mode, p. 14-51. To Adjust Copy Density / Background Whiteness Follow the procedure below to select the exposure (density) manually to make darker or lighter copies. Background Whiteness Adjust the background whiteness when copying newspaper or recycled paper originals. Background Whiteness Original —4 +4

1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face up

The Image Adjustment Screen will be displayed. 7-15

Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background{Copy Density) (continued)

Image Adjust D NArk L Copydensity

3. Touch the desired density level key from -1 to -4 to make the copy

image lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it darker. Q DETAILS + Touch STD. to select the middle density level. + To resume the AË, touch AUTO to highlight it.

4. Touch BACKGROUND ADJUST to adjust the background

whiteness, if necessary. Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the background lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it darker. Select Adjustnent level O1 EX Image Adjust MARK L Copydensity Touch OK. The Copy Density Adjustment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.

Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background(Copy Density) (continued) Setting Density Shift Use this function to shift each of nine density levels to three levels lighter or three levels darker. This function can be set to use in combination with each of the four Original Image modes (Text/Photo, Photo, Text, and Map) in each of the three colour modes (Full colour, Black, and Single colour), therefore twelve sorts of settings are available for the density adjustment. Î1. Select the desired colour mode from the Full colour, Black, or Single colour. Position original in the RADF face up

(e.g.) Selected Original Image mode: MAP, colour mode: FULL COLOUR Density Shift (Map Full colour) 3 (0-5) Selected Original image mode: TEXT/PHOTO, Colour mode: BLACK Density Shift (Text/Photo Black) 3 (0-5) 7-17

Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background{Copy Density) (continued) Selected Original image mode: TEXT, Colour mode: SINGLE COLOUR Density Shift (Text Single colour) 3 (0-5) CZ HIT For details of the Original Image mode, see p. 7-34 to p. 7-35.

4. Press any key (from 0 to 5) using the keypad to determine the

Density Shift in the selected Original Image mode of the desired Colour mode is determined. 7-18

Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) Change colour by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and also adjust the value of hue, saturation, and brightness. Modifying RGB Value Change the colour of the copy image by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) (continued) 4, Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colour lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it deeper. Q DETAILS Touch STD. to select the middle level.

The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-20

Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) (continued) Modifying HSB Value Change the colour of the copy image by making adjustments to Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.

3. Make an adjustment to Hue.

Touch HUE. Select Adjustnent level Image Adjust L Colour Adjust Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make yellow closer to red, and red closer to magenta. Or, touch a key from +1 to +4 to make yellow closer to green, and green closer to cyan. 7-21

Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) (continued) Q DETAILS Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. The Colour Adjusitment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. 4, Make an adjustment to Saturation. Touch SATURATION. Select Adjustnent level OOK

Image Adjust D NArk Colour Adjust Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colours dull, or from +1 to +4 to make them vivid. Q DETAILS Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. The Colour Adjusitment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.

5. Make an adjustment to Brightness.

Touch BRIGHTNESS. Select Adjustnent level Image Adjust LColour Adjust ADJUST sf) Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the image darker, or from +1 to +4 to make it brighter. 7-22

Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) (continued) Q DETAILS Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-23

Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment) Change the hue by varying the image’s cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) individually or mutually. This adjustment can be made in each density area (shadow, mid tone, or highlight) of the individual colour, or in the whole density area of each colour. The adjustment value ranges from -10 to +10.

1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face up

Adjustment Screen. Select Adjustnent level Image Adjust Colour Balance]

3. Select the desired density area.

Select Adjustnent level {__ SCREEN {OTHERS "a | MDToNE Cv) Check the shadow, mid tone, and highlight areas of the original, then select the desired density area to adjust the colour balance. If the adjustment is necessary for the whole density area, touch WHOLE AREA to highlight it. 7-24

Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment) (continued)

4. Select the colour and adjustment value.

Touch CYAN(C), MAGENTA(M), YELLOW(Y), or BLACK (K) to highlight it. Then, touch the A or Y key to display the desired adjustment value from -10 to +10. Q DETAILS The adjustment can be made for each density area. Repeat steps 3 and 4, if desired.

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-25

Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) This machine provides two methods to reproduce the print image; Line Screen and Dot Screen. The machine selects an appropriate method automatically according to the other copy conditions selected for the job. C2 Hinr See p. 7-11 “Reproducing Images” for details of Line Screen and Dot Screen. Follow the procedure below to select the reproducing method manually.

HIGH RESOLUTION / SMOOTH TONE

Specify either High Resolution or Smooth Tone, when selecting the reproducing method manually. High Resolution improves the resolution by maximizing the number of lines drawn. Smooth Tone provides a high-performance colour grading by lowering the drawing lines. HIGH COMPRESSION The desired copy result may not be obtained because the internal memory overflows when using the reproducing method selected manually or automatically according to the other copy conditions of the job. In this case, select High Compression to give priority to compressing the scanned data. AUTO Auto selects an appropriate reproducing method automatically according to the selected copy conditions. This mode is initially selected.

1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face u

SBECTAL ORIGINAL ÉAPPLICATION (RÔTATION Image Adjust L Screen 7-26

Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) (continued)

Touch AUTO to highlight it, if reproducing method should be selected automatically. 7-27

Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) (continued)

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-28

Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode In addition to the colour adjustment and reproducing method selection, this machine allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality. Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness) Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast) Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode) Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment. C2 Hinr See p. 7-18 to p. 7-14 for details of the Sharpness, Contrast, and Gloss mode.

Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode (continued)

3. Select the desired sharpness level.

Touch SHARPNESS, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the outline softer, or from +1 to +4 to make it sharper. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. Select Adjustnent level Image Adjust L Others ILE DUB | F Lt} & | Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. 4, Select the desired contrast level. Touch CONTRAST, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to decrease the contrast, or from +1 to +4 to increase the contrast. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. Select Adjustnent level EE: Image Adjust MARK L Others OTHERS EU CONTRAST | Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. 7-30

Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode (continued) 5, Select the Gloss Mode. Touch GLOSS MODE to highlight it. Select Setting item Image Adjust L Others [CoPYoensiTv] [Colour ADJUST] (COLOUR BALANCE) [7 SCREEN ]

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-31

Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) Image Detection detects and determines the photo portion and text area of the original when scanned, allowing you to obtain the optimum print result by modifying the standard for detection according to the character size of the text or its proportion in the whole original. For this adjustment, two items are provided; Text/Photo proportion adjustment and Black/Colour text proportion adjustment. + TEXT/PHOTO changes the ratio of detecting the text area of the original. + COLOUR/TEXT changes the proportion in detecting that the original text is black or coloured. Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.

1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face up

2. Touch OTHERS to display the Other Adjustment Screen.

Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) (continued)

Touch /MAGE JUDGE. Select Adjustnent level Image Adjust L Others

oo SCT LL 60 caro Ter À, -< 1-5 1-2 | In Make an adjustment to TEXT/PHOTO. Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of photo. Or, touch a key from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of text. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Make an adjustment to COLOUR/TEXT. Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of black text, or from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of coloured text. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK. The Other Adjustment Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. Touch OK. The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-33

Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original) The image quality or type of the original may affect the copy result. Use Original Image to improve the image quality by specifying the original image type as follows. + Originals including both text and photo (TEXT/PHOTO) + Photo originals or originals mainly composed of photos (PHOTO) + Text originals (TEXT) + Coloured original with small text such as a map (MAP) Use Original Type to improve the image quality by specifying the printed original type. + Normal original (PRINTED) Photo-printed original (PHOTO PAPER) Copied original (COPIED PAPER) Original printed using Ink-jet printer (INKJET PAPER)

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.

2. Touch the desired key in ORIG. IMAGE area and ORIG. TYPE area.

Select condition to scan originals COUNT / SET

ORIGINAL COUNT © MEMO

ORIGINAL M sreciat | SPECIAL x STD SETTING : Non STD size Ô FRÉCALL Tab paper Ci Only one selection can be made in each area. C2 Hinr In each ORIG. IMAGE mode, the copy density level can be shifted three levels darker or three levels lighter (Density Shift). See p. 7-17 for details. 7-34

Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original) (continued)

Position original in the RADF face up RE:

The Basic Screen will be restored, with the SPECIAL ORIGINAL key highlighted and the selected Original Image icon displayed. Q DETAILS + To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. + To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD. 7-35

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by the Key Operator. This function is not factory-set. When the copier is using the Weekly Timer function, the TIMER indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit. PRINT SCAN 4 POMERÉAER

PROOF COPY W) Reminder! IMPORTANT: WHEN THE TIMER INDICATOR IS LIT, THE COPIER WILL TURN OFF AUTOMATICALLY. DO NOT TURN IT OFF BY PRESSING POWER SWITCH. When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is unavailable due to the Weekly Timer function. However, copying can be available by using the following procedure. Î1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. & Q TRE TAN As Ciel

PROOF COPY CZ HIT For details of the Weekly Timer function, see p. 14-26 to p. 14-33. The Basic screen will be displayed along with the message shown below. Timer interrupt mode Enter password Q DETAILS The machine power will be turned off automatically 5 minutes after this message is shown if a password is not entered.

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) (continued) The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the Key Operator. In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key Operator, the following message will display instead. Input copy time O hour(s) 05 minute(s) When the above message displays, proceed to step 4. Enter the password. Enter a 4-digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the control panel. CZ HT For setting the Timer Interrupt password, see p. 14-38. Q DETAILS If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Press [START]. The following message will be displayed on the Basic Screen. Input copy time O hour(s) 05 minute(s) Set the hour for the interrupt use. Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hours is 3) using the keypad on the control panel. (0-9) Press [START]. Set the minute for the interrupt use. Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the keypad on the control panel. (00 - 59) Q DETAILS Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5. Press [START]. Copying is available until the set time is up. When Timer Interrupt of the copier is finished, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it. The copier returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled. 8-3

B5R The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically. Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.

8-4 Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it. Position original in the RADF face up

When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled. Touch to deselect ROTATION OFF to resume this function. When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on the screen.

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions, independently. Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Specifications © Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.250 -4.000 © Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom. Length: 0.500, Width: 0.500 Length: 0.500, Width: 1.000 Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000 Length: 0.500, Width: 4.000 ABCDE a —————— Width ñ

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued) The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed. ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch the vertical zoom key on the popup menu to highlight it,

then set the vertical zoom ratio. Position original in the RADF face up ORIGINAL COUNT 0 ENLARGE © #09

4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position original(s).

C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals.

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued) Q DETAILS The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom with an original placed slanted on the platen glass. e Lo } | LA ER] Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000 Length: 2.000, Width: 0.500 r—] e ao |L 1) = ÿ e lo l'] Length: 0.500, Width: 2.000 Length: 2.000, Width: 0.500

Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) The Fold and Stitch & Fold modes are available only when the FS-215 Finisher option is installed. When any of these modes is selected, the Booklet feature is automatically selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen. Q DETAILS + When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen. + When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted. The following copy results may be expected when using Fold or Stitch & Fold mode: In the Fold mode, each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher. In the Stitch & Fold mode, each copied set is stapled at two positions (saddle stitched), then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher. Specifications for Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode O Max. number of folded sheets (80 gm paper) in both modes: Fold: 8 sheets (less than in Stitch & Fold mode because they are not clinched first) Stitch & Fold: 20 sheets 19 sheets when using thick cover paper © Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11x17", 8.5’x14”, 8.5"x11’R O Paper weight: 64 - 105 gm?( (80 gm? paper is recommended) O Booklet tray capacity: When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will stop operating. Select the appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities. Approx. 80 sheets max. (A8, B4, 11x17”, 8.5"x14") Fold: 26 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (26 x 3 = 78 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 16 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (16 x 5 = 80 sheets) 5 sets max. of 15-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 15 = 75 sheets) Approx. 60 sheets max. (A4R, 8.5”x1 1”R) Fold: 20 sets max. of 8-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 3 = 60 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 12 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (12 x 5 = 60 sheets) © Incompatible conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1» 1, 2» 1, ACS, Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Three-Fold, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat © Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image

Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) (continued) Stitch & Fold 8 sheets max. 16 sheets max. 15 sheets max. when using thick cover paper

EXIT TRAY G M " THREE- FOLD|

Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) (continued)

8-10 Q DETAILS Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow pointing from the Main tray shifis to the Booklet tray. When selecting STITCH & FOLD, the machine with the trimmer unit installed selects TRIM automatically. To cancel the trimming mode, touch TRIM to deselect it. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area. Select additional copying features, as required. Q DETAILS NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected. To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position originals. CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Q DETAILS When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode: 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode: 64 pages or less for simplex copying 32 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the finisher. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-8.

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) The Punch mode is available only when the PK-120 Punching kit option is installed on the FS-115/FS-215 finisher. When the Punch mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary (Main) tray output modes, each copied sheet is punched and output to the Primary tray according to the selected output mode. Q DETAILS + Some staple positions previously selected may conflict with this function. + Special size paper (STD size (special), Non STD size, Wide size paper) cannot be punched. + _Ifthe ATS (Automatic Tray Switching) functions while the machine usesthe Punch mode, the punch holes may be slighily off the appropriate positions. Q) Reminder! + Do not punch special paper type such as labels, tabbed sheets, etc. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur in Punching kit. + Be sure that the paper guides of the paper tray are securely aligned to the paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position. Specifications for Punch Mode © Copy paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5 (80 g/m? paper recommended) Q Paper weight: 60 - 90 g/m? Thin paper: 50 - 59 g/m? Thick paper: 91 - 170 g/m°? Number of holes: 4 holes Hole diameter: 6.5 mm + 0.5 mm Hole pitch: 80 mm + 0.5 mm Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (available when using Platen store mode), Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Cover Sheet mode, Output modes using secondary tray, Mixed Original (A4R, B5 mixed), Copy insertion mode in Chapter, Cover sheet mode in Booklet a0QûQ ——| o 80 mm —+—| o

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued)

2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.

Select Punch node ORIGINAL COUNT. © FREE Jo8 01 OUTPUT 4, Touch the desired punch position key to highlight it.

5. Touch OK on the Punch Position popup menu to restore the

Output Mode popup menu.

6. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the

setting and return to the Basic Screen. The selection made in punch position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area. 8-12

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued) Z. Specify the original set direction. Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL COUNT. © NonSTDsize Ô Tab paper Ci Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original set direction, then touch OK'to return to the Basic Screen.

8. Select additional copying features, as required.

9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals in the document feeder.

CZ HIT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals. 11.Press [START À CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 8-13

Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) The Three-Fold mode is available only when the FS-215 Finisher option is installed. In this mode, the original image is copied on A4R/8.5”x11”"R copy paper and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher. Specifications for Three-Fold Mode © Copy paper size: A4R, 8.5”x1 1”R (80 gm° paper recommended) Max. number of folded sheets (80 g/m only): 3 sheets

0 Paper weight: 64 - 105 g/m°; Special stock (80 g/m? paper is recommended) Q Booklet tray capacity: 50 sets max. of 1-sheet-folded set (50 sheets) © Incompatible Conditions: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output modes using secondary tray, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi- Page Enlargement, Reverse Image

1. Load A4R or 8.5”x11”R copy paper in a tray.

Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) (continued)

Touch THREÉE-FOLD to highlight it. EXIT TRAY

sort Efnll runcn Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. The THREÉE-FOLD icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area. Select additional copying features, as required. Touch to highlight the A4R or 8.5”’x11”R tray key, if not already highlighted. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position originals. HINT See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Q DETAILS Up to 3 originals can be three-folded. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-14. 8-15

Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) The Trimming mode is available only when the TU-109 Trimmer unit option is installed on the FS-215 Finisher. This function can be used with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode to make each copied set folded or stitched & folded, trimmed at the edge that opens the booklet, then output to the Trimmer unit tray. Specifications for Trimming Mode O Max. number of folded sheets (80 gm? paper) in both modes: Fold and Trimming: 3 sheets Stitch & Fold and Trimming: 16 sheets 15 sheets when using thick cover paper © Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R (64 - 105 g/m°) O Trimmer unit tray capacity: When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and Trimmer unit will stop operating. Select an appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities. Approx. 410 sheets max. Fold and Trimming: 100 sets max. of 8-sheet-folded booklet (100 x 3 = 300 sheets max.) Stitch & Fold and Trimming:80 sets max. of 2-5-sheet-folded booklet (80 x 5 = 400 sheets max.) 40 sets max. of 6-10-sheet-folded booklet (40 x 10 = 400 sheets max.) 25 sets max. of 11-16-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 16 = 400 sheets max.) © Incompatible Conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 11, 21, ACS, Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation sort, Rotation group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat © Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image Fold and Trimming Stitch & Fold and Trimming

Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) (continued)

Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted. SURFACE Select the desired trimming mode. Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired. When selecting FOLD, also touch TRIM to highlighi it. When selecting STITCH & FOLD, the machine with the trimmer unit installed selects TRIM automatically. EXIT TRAY Q DETAILS + When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen. + When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area. Select additional copying features, as required. Q DETAILS NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is initially selected. To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting. 8-17

Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) (continued)

6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position originals.

C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Q DETAILS When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode: 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode: 64 pages or less for simplex copying 32 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the Finisher.

À CAUTION When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and Trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-16. 8-18

Cover Sheet Feeding The Cover Sheet Feeder (P1-110) is available as an option on the FS-115/215 finisher. Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front covers for copied sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet-type covers for copied sets output to the Booklet tray in the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode. Q DETAILS + Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied. + This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET) in Booklet and cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion. Specifications for Cover Sheet Feeding Cover paper size: Upper tray; A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 8.5"x1 1”, 8.5’x11"R, 5.5x8.5"* Lower tray; A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5"x11”, 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" * “A5 and 5.5”x8.5" paper sizes are available in portrait type feeding only. © Cover paper weight: 50 - 200 g/m? cover paper Q Tray capacity: 200 sheets (200 g/m? cover paper) or 30mm thick for both trays Q Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Punch, Cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion, Cover sheet mode in Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement © Incompatible with Back cover feeding: Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold Cover sheet Copied set with v V4 cover attached ve 7 = ù Copied sets with cover attached in Fold or Stitch & Fold mode Lan

Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)

D 1 8-20 Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted. EXIT TRAY | SUB TRAY & SURFACE Touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen. Touch FRONT, FRONT+BACK, or BACK to highlight it, then select the covers tray. Select Cover sheet node ORIGINAL COUNT. © When selecting FRONT+BACK mode, different tray sources can be specified for each. CZ HIT Copy paper sizes available to be loaded are different in each tray. See the specifications on p. 8-19. Touch OK to restore the Output Mode popup menu. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored. Select additional copying features, as required.

Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)

8. Load the cover sheet paper into the optional cover sheet feeder of

the FS-115/215 finisher. Upper tray Ifthe paper size loaded in the cover sheet feeder is not suitable, the following messages will be displayed and copying will be unavailable till the correct size is loaded. Please load cover sheet in cover sheet feeder Adapt paper size between cover sheet and selected paper

9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals.

C2 Hinr See p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. 11.Press [START À CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 8-21

Off-Line Finishing The Off-Line Finishing function enables you to finish documents independent of copier operation. The Off-Line Finishing function is available only with the Cover Sheet Feeder option (PI-110) installed on the FS-115/215 Finisher. To use this convenient function, simply place a set of paper into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, select the desired mode from the Off-Line Finishing operation panel located on the top of the finisher, then press the Start/Stop button. Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described below. FS-115 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + 1 oblique staple: Primary (main) tray

• 2 parallel staples: Primary (main) tray FS-115 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + PK-120 Punching Kit - 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples

• Punch FS-215 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder - 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples + Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) + Three-Fold FS-215 Finisher + P1-110 Cover Sheet Feeder+ PK-120 Punching Kit 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) Three-Fold Punch Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples © Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5", 12"x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5"x14”, 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11’R *A5 paper is available in portrait type feeding only. © Paper weight: 50 - 200 g/m° © Staple capacity: 50 sheets max. O Output tray: Primary (main) tray Specifications for Manual Punch O Paper size: A3 to B5 © Paper weight: 50 - 170* g/m° cover *Some 170 gm paper types may not be punched easily. O Punch capacity: 200 sheets max. (200 g/m? paper) or within 30mm thick O Output tray: Primary (main) tray Specifications for Manual Stitch & Fold mode © Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12°x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x1 1’R © Paper weight: 60 - 200 gm © Staple capacity: 16 sheets max. (80 g/m? paper) 0 15 sheets max. (80 g/m° paper with a thick paper cover) O Output tray: Booklet tray 8-22

Off-Line Finishing (continued) Specifications for Three-Fold mode O Paper size: A4R, 8.5’x11"R O Paper weight: 60 - 80 g/m? © Fold capacity: 3 sheets max. (80 g/m? paper) O Output tray: Booklet tray Start/Stop button

Stitch & Fold 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples l} | Three-Fold | Î1. Place a set of paper to be finished into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, as described below for each mode. 1 oblique staple / 2 parallel staples: FACE UP Punch: FACE UP Stitch & Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the finished set Three-Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the folded set Align the guide plate. The indicator light of Start/Stop button will turn green. HINT Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper size and capacity in each mode. Press Staple Mode Selection button and/or Punch button to select the desired mode. Q DETAILS Punch mode is compatible with 1 oblique staple, 2 parallel staples, or Stitch & Fold mode. 8-23

Off-Line Finishing (continued)

3. Press Start/Stop button.

Finished sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected mode. Q DETAILS If you want to stop the Off-Line Finishing operation, press the Start/Stop button again. The finisher will cease operating. When using Stitch & Fold mode, the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the finisher. À CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 8-8 and p. 8-14. À CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandied paper will occur. 8-24

SECTION Special Original How to Make a Copy of Special Original Specifying Original Direction 9-2 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)... 9-4 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) 9-6 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original)... 9-8 Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness).. 9-10

Specifying Original Direction Specify the direction of the originals placed on RADF or platen glass. This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making double- sided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is specified. Originals on RADF: Originals on platen glass: A Ca HE) UE) Ex

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.

Specifying Original Direction (continued)

Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. The SPECIAL ORIGINAL key on the Basic Screen is highlighted, and the icon in the message area indicates the selected original direction. Position original in the RADF face u

RE 08 O0 ORIGINAL COUNT TE

STATUS FUNCTION- THAGE ADJUÈT. Make other compatible selections. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the original direction specified in step 2. CZ HT See the illustration on previous page, and p. 3-4 to p. 3-9 for details on positioning originals. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through RADF or positioned on the platen glass (STD size mode). Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing special size originals. Use Tab paper mode to copy a tabbed original, including the image of the tab part, onto tabbed copy paper. Specifications for Original Form © Tab extension width: 12.5 mm or less Q Incompatible with Non STD Size: Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Storing image in Overlay Memory © Incompatible with FULL AREA: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Image Shift © Incompatible with Tab Paper: 2»2, 2»1, APS, AMS, ACS, Single Colour, Full Colour, Original Type in Special Original, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Storing image in Overlay Memory

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Non STD size or Tab paper.

The popup menu will appear for Non STD size or Tab paper size setting. Scan originals as STD size Please select size ORIGINAL COUNT. © Scan originals as STD size Please select size ORIGINAL COUNT. © ORIGINAL 9-4

Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) (continued) Touch the desired size key. Q DETAILS When selecting FULL AREA on the Non STD size mode menu, the copier scans the full area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected. Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting. The popup menu will disappear. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. Load copy paper. HINTS + To loadtabbed copy paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper. See p. 3-18 to p. 3-21. To load tabbed copy paper in any other tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-21 to p. 14-22. + Forthe procedure of tabbed copy paper supply, see p. 2-30 to p. 2-32. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder, or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. C2 Hirs + See p. 3-4 to p. 8-9 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy mixed size originals. Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode). Specifications for Mixed Original 9 Use RADF. © Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the RADF original guides. See p. 12-10 for details. Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Three-Fold, Punch (B6R mixed), Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Ârea Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Overay, Storing image in Overlay Memory APS mode Automatically select the paper of the same size as that of the

Automatically select magnification ratio Mixed size originals to copy onto the same paper in size.

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. Q) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

7 FTRÉCALL Tab paper [_} | The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed. 9-6

Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) (continued)

3. Touch Mixed Original, then touch OK.

Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL COUNT.….© SPECIAL ORIG. Normal

fZ-Folded The Special Original popup menu will be restored.

4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

5. Select additional copying features, as desired.

Q DETAILS APS is automatically selected on the Basic Screen. To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired paper size.

6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

CZ Hits + See p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur.

Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) Use the Z-folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals. Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly. This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size. Specifications for Z-Folded Original 9 Use RADF. © Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non- Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing image in Overlay Memory Z-folded original

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.

Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL COUNT. © SPECIAL | SPECIAL SETTING ÉNonSTD size Ô Tab paper | } The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.

Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) (continued)

Touch Z-Folded original, then touch OK. SPECIAL ORIG. Mixed Dbnale=) The Special Original popup menu will be restored. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position Z-folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder. CZ Hits + See p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. 9-9

Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness) Use the Thin or Thick original mode with the document feeder to copy thin or thick originals. Otherwise, the originals may be misfed in the document feeder. Specifications for Original Thickness 9 Use RADF. © Incompatible Copying Conditions: None

2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.

Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL COUNT © à [Fib) RECALL Tab paper Ci gs The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.

3. Touch Thick or Thin as required, then touch OK.

Select condition to scan originals

ORIGINAL COUNT 0 MEMO 100

SPECIAL ORIG. THICKNESS SPECIAL

CIAL TTING The Special Original popup menu will be restored. 4, Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

5. Select additional copying features, as desired.

Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness) (continued)

6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

CZ Hits + See p. 3-4 to p. 3-7 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-11

• SECTION Applications How to Use Application Functions To Display Application Selection Screen -2 Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) 10-3 Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) 10-7 Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) … 10-10 Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) … p. 10
• -13 Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ….… p. 10
• -17 Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) …. 10-20 Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) … 10-24 Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement) …. 10-27 Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase). 10-30 Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image). 10-32 Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert /Horiz. Mode) 10-34 Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode). 10-37 Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) … 10-40 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) 10-43 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) -45 Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift). 10-48 Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) … 10-51 Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) … … p. 10
• …. 10-58 Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) -62 Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD {Overlay Memon) 10-65 p. 10

To Display Application Selection Screen Follow the procedure below to display the Application Selection Screen and select the desired copying features. Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. Position original in the RADF face up ce ER Er

Q DETAILS + When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. lf you touch a function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate settings. + Check BOOK MARK in the message area of the subsequent screen, if desired, so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the setting you made. + If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear dimmed. + The APPLICATION key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when application selections have been made. To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL. To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.

2. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

Selections will be completed and the Basic Screen will be restored. W) Reminder! With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START] to perform the operation. 10-2

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers. Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion © Use RADF. © Trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have the same paper size loaded. AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically selected. O Max. insert sheets: 30 locations, from 1-999, including front and back covers Q incompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

10-4 Load regular sheets into any tray, and insertion sheets and covers into each tray source to be designated on the Sheet/ Cover Insertion Screen. Q DETAILS + When using thick paper or tabbed paper for covers or insertions, load them in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, unless previously specified and loaded in any other tray. - Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions have the same paper size loaded. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. W) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen. Select Application function

| DELETE J | SET | =

Example: Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover.

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source. The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/ Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode. If no insertion is desired, proceed to step 8. When selecting Insertion mode: Enter the page number. Select covers and/or Application insertion sheets, then press OK LS/C Insertion COVERS INSERT(S) —_ PAS Elan using keypac) <_ 1715 Tray INORMAL Tray 2NORMAL G 4 CG ske. elP 1 CHANGE OF THE TRAY! CHANGE OF THE TRAY! F f AC] | [ Ï ni NSERT Ë eu EN | EE + di —— Touch to select the desired insertion mode, then use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of insertion location. Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The insertion location will be deleted. Poecere | [ ser À DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion location. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. The first (upper left) key displays the Front Cover icon if selected. The Back Cover icon appears, if selected, as the last (fixed) key, with one active blank key preceding it. Example: lf p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p. 4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4. NOTES: + The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically. + Entering “0” orthe same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. + When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count, it will be ignored. Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the insertion tray source. The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/ Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode. 10-5

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

8. When all settings are completed, touch OK to return to the

Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored.

9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 Hirs + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-38 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

11.Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. 10-6

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) Chapter is used with RADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the presentation of double- sided copies. To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required. Specifications for Chapter O Use RADF. © Max. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 - 999 © Use STAMP together with this function to print chapter number onto chapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark numbering. See p. 10-51 to p. 10-61. © Incompatible Conditions: 11, 21, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Face Up, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing Image in Copies in Overlay Memory Chapter mode s

2. Touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function FILE EDIT. IMAGE EDIT. É Sheet/Cover | F AUTO Insertion d Layout c Reverse 1m suit | ATP ay The Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen will be displayed. 10-7

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)

10-8 Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title page. Chapter node Application Enter page nunber by keypad L Chapter ŒE: CTI]

Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered number will be deleted. Q DETAILS + Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. + Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence. + When a page number is larger than the total original page count, insertion occurs as the last page of the document. <@D oPTION Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen to use this function. To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch COPIED INSERT on the screen. In this case, you can touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to change the currently selected paper tray displayed on the screen. Chapter mode Application Enter page nunber by keypad L Chapter Œ Cr CTTL LT] Tray 1 NORMAL

Cerf [sl When all entries are made, touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored.

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)

6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 Hirs + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-7. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 10-9

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4in 1,or8in 1). Specifications for Combination 9 Use RADF. © AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected.) © Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory . 4 in 1 copying Original COMBINATION 2in 1 copying 1 2 8 in 1 copying 11213\4 L 2

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued)

poëoT] Combination mode O1 EX Application L Combination MARK Touch 2in1, 4in1or8inlinthe desired order area, referring to the illustration on the following page. Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Position original in the RADF face up FREE Jo8 01

GUTPUT COLOUR MODE LENS MODE

COLOUR FULL perce | ane AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the one that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen, touch the desired tray key. Select the desired original direction. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. 10-11

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued) Z. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 Hirs + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 8-7. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-38 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. À DETAILS: Original Type and Layout Order Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode. Layout Horizontal order Vertical order Original 2ini 4ini Bini 4ini 8in1 Portrait type

Making a Multiple Page Signature Bookiet (Booklet) Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper from any tray unless it is specified as Thick (210 - 256 g/m? paper) or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order. Specifications for Booklet © Use RADF. © Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last. O AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size. O Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, 11, 21, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Face Up, Cover sheet feeder with Cover mode in Booklet, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi- Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Sioring Image in Overlay Memory 1-sided originals

Load the desired copy paper size in a tray. When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover sheet (Copy sheet) or Cover sheet (Blank sheet), load the same size paper in any other tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode.

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)

3. Touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT. 1YOU ) Application L Booklet

When a cover sheet is required, touch CHANGE OF THE PAPER TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source. Touch the desired output order key if you want to change the output order.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Select additional Applications, as desired. CZ HIT Key Operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42.

6. Touch OK onthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. AMS is selected automatically. Z. Select the tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1. To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper size.

8. Select the 732 or 2»2 copy mode.

Q DETAILS If the copier is equipped with FS-215 Finisher, Fold or Stitch & Fold output mode is available. Follow the procedure on p. 10-16 to use the function. 10-14

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)

9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 Hirs + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-7. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds

ÿ) Reminder! Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last. M Reminder! When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode64 pages or less for simplex copying 32 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause misfeeds in the finisher. 11.Press [START À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. À CAUTION When the Booklet / Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher / trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 12-

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued) 10-16 VAN CAUTION The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher. DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled & folded sheets; otherwise, you may be injured. À DETAILS: Selecting Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode 1 Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlighit it. 2 Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired. Select Finisher node ORIGINAL COUNT 0 NOTE: Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow shown beside the Main tray shifts to the Booklet tray. 3 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored with the OUTPUT MENU highlighted.

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set. The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the document feeder. Specifications for Image Insert © Use RADF and platen glass. O Max. image insert: 30 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999 © Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory 1-sided originals placed on RADF Insertion originals 2-sided originals on platen glass placed on RADF Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. Q) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen.

= MS Lol SET RENeTSe [a mage shirt JE] St ae [ALL CLEAR] É CANCEL } É Ok ] The Image Insertion No. Setting Screen will be displayed. 10-17

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)

Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered page number will be deleted. À DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be inserted as follows: The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2. The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image insertion. The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6. NOTES: + When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as the last page. + Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of sequence. + _Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that location. © oPTION Touch Bookleton the Image Insertion No. Setting Screen to use this function. When all page number entries are made, touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. 10-18

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued) Z. Scan the document feeder images: Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into memory.

1 1. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals. CZ Hits + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10. + Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.

The copier will start printing when ready for output. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 10-19

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) The Dual Page mode performs image division on the original image. Use this function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two A4 sheets in 1-1 or 2-1 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one A4 sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode. The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Screen. - Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the first scan. + Front Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copies normally. + Front/Back Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan copy normally. Specifications for Dual Page Q Store mode is automatically selected. O Paper size: A4 O Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/Trimming (available with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Mutti- Page Enlargement, Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory 1-1/2-1 mode Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 10-20

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued)

fi Dual page node Application L Dual Page ADDITIONAL FÜNCTION F Booklet | Front cover Front/Back cover +Facing pages +Facing pages Touch to highlight the desired mode key.

4. Touch Output-n to 1 or Output-1 to n'to select the output order

according to the original pagination. @D oPTION Touch Booklet on the Dual Page Screen to use this function.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. APS and AMS are automatically released, and the STORE key appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected. 10-21

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued)

10-22 Select the desired copy mode and magnification. Q DETAILS + Available paper size is A4. + When selecting Facing pages mode and scanning from the platen glass, select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode. + _ APS and AVS are released and 1.000 magnification is selected automatically. Change the magnification manually, if desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s). When using platen glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN with document feeder kept open. When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP. For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Facing pages and Front/ Back Cover + Facing pages mode, see the description on the following page. Press [START] to scan. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals. ÿ) Reminder! When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. Press [START]. The copier will start printing when ready for output. À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur.

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued) Q Scanning Original for Cover Use platen glass for scanning original for cover.

Open the document feeder. Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the platen glass. Press [START] to start scanning. When Front/Back Cover + Facing pages is selected, scan original for back cover according to the above steps 2and 3. Use platen glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body text originals. To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from the first page. Press [START] to start scanning. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals. “Front cover + Facing pages” Scan from SURVEYORS | REPORT first page Copies “Front/Bac TE Scan from suRvevoRs | first page PORT ° Copies “Front cover + Facing pag pr la] ] ? “Front/Back cover + Facing pages” EU uavevors| REPORT IA \ Copies NOTES: + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10. + When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job. 10-23

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) In the ordinary Store mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set (referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set. Specifications for Program Job © Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job. © Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting for Multi-sheet bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB. © Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB. The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs. © Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory. © Incompatible Conditions: APS, Change paper size, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, 2/4/8 Repeat in Repeat, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory Original A Original B Copied set Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. 10-24 Q) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) (continued)

Touch Program Job on the Application Selection Screen. Select Application function Non-image ! AUTO F REygree QU mace shit EE EE The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected. Select the desired copy conditions. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. If the number of document feeder originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Press [START]. The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequent JOBs. When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will be displayed in the Basic Screen. Touch DECISION. Press START to scan originals CO Please press STORE by scanning complete,

OUTPUT This JOB is decision CANCEL À This JOB is cancel led The current JOB images will be stored. To delete the images, touch CANCEL. 10-25

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) (continued)

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.

Q) Reminder! PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION. CZ Hits + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-9 to p. 5-10. + Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.

9. Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from

the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.

11.Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. 10-26

Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Muiti-Page Enlargement) Use this function to make an enlarged copy, made up of several copied pages divided and enlarged from an original image. Specifications for Multi-Page Enlargement © Use the platen glass only. © Use APS, or select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen. If APS is used, the largest paper size will be selected automatically. O The output size can be selected (standard size) or determined when a magnification ratio is entered on the screen. © Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 12, 222, 2»1, APS, AMS, 1:1, Staple, Group, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Cover Sheet Feeding, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size (except FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp/ verlay Original Mult-page enlargement

1. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

The machine will detect the original size. M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen.

Positi iginal in the RADF E face up original in e 2ESER

ICOLOUR MODE FUNCT ON

IMAGE c ADJUËT, F SINGLE É ï + COLOUR Ê STAPLE Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. If APS is selected (initial setting), the largest paper size loaded in a tray will be selected automatically. 10-27

Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement) (continued)

3. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

4, Touch Multi-page Enlargement on the Application Selection Screen. The Multi-Page Enlargement Setting Screen will be displayed, with the original size and paper size (tray number) indicated. Multi-page Enlargenent function mode O BOOK

Application Set output size or magnification DARK LM-page Enlar gement} OUTPUT SIZE Original size Special | STD. SIZE Papersze A3 CTray 1) . Output size Z00M Quantity ---sheets

5. Select an output size or magnification, as desired.

Application Set output size or magnification DARK LM-page Enlar gement} OUTPUT SIZE Original size Special | STD. SIZE Papersze A3 CTray 1) . Output size 4000 Quantity 008 sheets The output size or magnification specified on the popup menu and output quantity to make up a whole image will be displayed on the Multi-Sheet Enlargement Setting Screen. Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. The actual number of copies will be the product of output quantity multiplied by print quantity. C2 Hinr See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. 10-29

Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the platen glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied. Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase © Use the platen glass only. Keep RADF open throughout the procedure. © Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 22, 2x1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page in RADF Store mode, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Storing Image in Overlay Memory CTI

2. Touch Non-image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 10-30

Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) (continued)

4. Select magnification and paper size, as desired.

Q DETAILS + APS and AMS are automatically released. + Copy mode is automatically set to 11. 1f 12 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

Having Any Problem? This function may perform incorrecily if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation. 10-31

Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice versa. This is very good for copying white-on-black originals and reversing them to fax. Specifications for Reverse Image © Incompatible Conditions: Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Stamp, Overlay ABCD ABCD nd ABCD ABCD ABCD Original Reverse Image copying Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Reverse Image on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

É Sheet/Cover É Ë Image sertie | Chapter EH} ua Page 23 Combination Program [a] PE F He | Multi — Frame/Fold Sookiet À7 frere fa cer] [ canœL][ ok | The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

3. Touch OK onthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 4, Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. 10-32

Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) (continued)

5. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 Hinr For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.

À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. 10-33

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10 mm - 150 mm in both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass. Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications © Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.) © Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 22, 2»1, APS, AMS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode Horizontal width Repeat copy OA FVatiea ABABAB Width ABABAB ABABAB Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. Q) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

[ALL CLEAR] | CANCEL } [ok ] The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed. 10-34

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) (continued)

Touch MANUAL, then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area. Repeat node( setting range 10-150nn) OK 0807 | B: Application (el MARK L Repeat REPEAT Use up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150 mm in 1 mm increments. Keep touching the key to increase/decrease the value continuously. Or, touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH USING KEYPAD to display the popup menu to enter the value from the touch screen keypad. fuoe OT] Repeat node( setting range 10-150nn) Application P 9 9 (ml Eee L_Repeat | 100nn | VERTI. WIDTH}{RS |100nn | HORIZ. WIDTH Foancec }L Ok 1f: Touch VERTI. WIDTH or HORIZ. WIDTH, enter the value for each, then touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen. Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Select the desired magnification and paper size. Q DETAILS + APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnfication ratio. + Copy mode is automatically set to 11. If 12 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically. 10-35

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert/Horiz. Mode) (continued) Z. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

C2 Hinr See theillustration on p. 10-34 for details.

À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 10-36

Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mocke) Auto Detection mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase. Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper size and mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by specified times in one copy sheet. Auto Detection/ Repeat Mode Specifications © Auto Detection Mode: Use the platen glass. RADF cannot be used. O Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.000 (100%) fixed O incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode Using RADF, 22, 2»1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay Q incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode APS, AMS, Rotation (if magnification is changed from 1.000), Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non- Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Overlay Memory Auto Detection mode Repeat mode Copy ABCI ABCI (2 Repeat) ABCD AB AB Copy ABC! ABCI (4 Repeait)

Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Reneat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued) Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen ÿ) Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT. [ALL CLEAR] | CANCEL } ok ] The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.

3. Touch to highlight the desired mode key.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application Selection Screen when AUTO mode is selected. C2 nr When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See p. 10-45 to p. 10-47.

Repeating Automatically or Selecting RepeatingTimes (Repeat: AUTO Repeat Mode) (continued) The Basic Screen will be restored.

6. Select the desired magnification and paper size.

Q DETAILS + APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnfication ratio. + When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeait, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000 (100%). + Copy mode is automatically set to 11. 1f 12 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically. Z. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original.

For AUTO mode original, open the document feeder, then position the original FACE DOWN on the platen glass. For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, RADF is also available. C2 Hinr See the illustration on p. 10-37 for details. ÿ) Reminder! When AUTO mode is selected, Non-Image Area Erase functions automatically. DO NOT close the document feeder.

À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q DETAILS The AUTO mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation. 10-39

Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean up and improve the presentation of the copy. Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure { Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Repeat

Select Application function

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

L Sheet/C { E ÉNon-image É AUTO F Chapter (EH) || ouai Page Image Shift mare |E dE L 3 L Bocklet 377 The Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen will be displayed. 10-40

Eliminating Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) (continued)

Frame Erasure (Each side) «lolo le SINIENIE p lo len + Touch to highlight FOLD, if not highlighted, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount, from 1 to 99 mm in 1 mm increments. Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. C2 nr For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9. Q DETAILS When lowering the document feeder onto thick original (e.g. open book), do not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 10-42

Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre the whole image on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper. Specifications for AUTO Layout © Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually when using RADF to scan originals. O Incompaïble Conditions: 22, 2x1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter“, Combination*, Booklet*, Image Insert, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image*, Repeat, Image Shift, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory

• Chapter, Combination, Booklet and Reverse Image are available when Non-Image Area Erase is released manually. > ABCD ABCD

Select Application function un EDIT IMAGE EDIT Stamp/ Oéerlay k The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Q DETAILS + Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using RADF to scan the original, touch to deselect this function. + If Dual Page is used with this function, the original smaller than the selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper without image division performed. 10-43

Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) (continued)

Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Basic Screen. Q DETAILS + APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. + Copy mode is automatically set to 11. f 12 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. C2 Hi For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9. ÿ) Reminder! DO NOT close the RADF when Non-Image Area Erase is selected. Placing original obliquely on the platen glass may cause black copy marks. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q Having Any Problem? The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation. 10-44

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose of creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes. Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected. Use this function to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See the illustration on p. 10-47 for details. If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift. See p.10-48. Specifications for Image Shift © Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 14-37 to 14-42. Q Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, AUTO Layout, Storing images in Overlay Memory Right — sBcol | ascn 1JKL EFGH MS | No TU V PQRS Down

1. Selectthe copy mode and paper size from the Basic Screen,

M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 10-45

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)

3. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

shift direction and amount. Shift node (setting range 0-250nn) Application Reduce shift model setting range 0-250nn) L Image Shift Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount individually; or touch BOTH SIDES to specify collectively. The BACK and BOTH SIDES keys function only for duplex copying. Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be created on the printed sheets. When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected, the PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability. Shift node (setting range 0-250nn) Application Reduce shift nodel setting range 0-250nm) L Image Shift 15.0mm + PAGE SPACE on 4 | 15.0mm REDUCERSHIFT .Omm + (1 Omm Y If desired, touch PAGE SPACE!to highlight it, then enter the desired amount using the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key. 10-46

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued) Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q DETAILS: Page Space Function Page space Booklet | L- A B Original Page space 2 Repeat in Repeat

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss when creating a binding margin. 10-48 Specifications for Reduce & Shift Q AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released. © Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 14-37 to 14-42. © Incompatible Conditions: Change magnification, V/H zoom, APS, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory > Right Left <= JABCDT 112345 EFGHI) ® 6789 JKLMN OPQR 10 11 12 S TU V} pou 13 14 15 WXYZ|] {161718 Front Back ABCD Left ST Re Right EFGHI ABCD 12345

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued)

1. Select the copy mode and paper size, as required.

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

{ Shéet/Cover [Jh f Ë Chapter EI ? REygree on Stamp/ OVerlay Qi Frame/Fold Booklet FF} Pi Erasure D

4. Touch REDUCE&SHIFT on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then

f 0 Touch FRONT or BACK. In Reduce & Shift mode, the BOTH SIDES key appears dimmed to show inactivity. Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be printed on the printed sheets. Q DETAILS The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and magniication ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch BACK and make direction and amount change. 10-49

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued) 10-50 Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HIT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9. Press [START]. À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of stamp, page number, numbering, and date/time at the location designated on the screen. The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) provided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in multiple combinations. Specification for STAMP, SET NUMBERING, PAGE NUMBERING, DATE/TIME © Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay (with STAMP and SET NUMBERING), Overlay Memory Top-Left T-Middle T-Right TOP SECRET > D) eu) STAMP 002 / 005 SET NUMBERING D CD a Middle-Left Middle M-Right 2/5 PAGE NUMBERING ‘03/10/10 10:30AM CD CD CD DATE/TIME Lower-Left L-Middie L-Right Printing positions Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. (M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 10-51

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

| Chapter EH É Dual Page | ù al-E

É Booklet É ï Frame/Fold (ft Erasure Je se [ALL CLEAR] [ CANCEL ] [ok ] The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed. Touch to select the desired key in the STAMP area. Select desired Stamp/Over lay function Application and press OK L Stamp/Overlay WATERMARK OVERLAY

[PLEASE REPLY] CONFIDENTIAL TT IMPORTANT

ALL PAGES PRINTED PAGE [FINE ADJ. OF POSITION] | CANCEL } ok ] Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select LARGER or SMALLER. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. 10-52

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) When selecting SET NUMBERING: Specify the numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No. Select desired NUMBERING function application and press OK L Stamp/Overlay 20 pt

Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 10-55 for details. When selecting PAGE NUMBERING: Specify the page numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No. Select desired PAGE NUMBERING function REX Application and press OK RES L Stamp/Overlay COVER 8 pt Print ON GOTHIC CPERTHE] up {

Print OFF 1 HT| (CHANGE OF THE Fr STARTING No FINE ADJ. OF POSITION] CANCEL ] OK ] Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-56 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the front/back cover or insertions. See p. 10-57 for details. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 10-56 for details. 10-53

PRINTED PAGE [FINE ADJ. OF POSITION] | CANCEL } [ok ] Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 ptor 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-56 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. Touch OK. The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired. Select the stamp colour. Select stanp node and colour SELECT STAMP FUNCTION : . —_—_—_—— MAGENTA

Touch STAMP COLOUR SELECT to display the Stamp Colour Selection Screen. Touch the desired stamp type key to highlight it, then select the stamp colour from the right side portion of the screen. Touch OKto return to the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. 10-54

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. CZ HT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9. 11.Press [START À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q DETAILS: Fine Adjustment Setting Screen When FINE ADJ. OF POSITION is touched, the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen will be displayed. NUHBERING function BOOK Perte Fine adjustnent for printed position É y The position is moved from base point UP SIDE : EE mm RIGHT SIDE : 10.0 mm Touch TOP SIDE, BOTTOM SIDE, RIGHT SIDE, or LEFT SIDE to specify the direction, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired amount, from 0 to 50 mm. Touch OK to return to the previous screen. Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from SET NUMBERING or WATERMARK NUMBERING NUHBERING function Application Enter starting number L-Stemp/Overlay Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number, then touch OK to return to the previous screen. 10-55

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from PAGE NUMBERING When Chapter is already selected, the chapter starting number can also be specified on the Starting No. Setting Screen. PAGE NUMBERING funct ion application Enter starting number 1 Stamp/Overlay PAGE NUMBER | CHAPTER NUMBER Touch PAGE NUMBER or CHAPTER NUMBER to highlight it, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number for each. Use +<->- to enter a minus number to print from halfway Originals through, e.g. —2 to print “1” from page 4. Touch OK to return to the » previous screen. When “(+)2" is entered': Copies Hi Et 0: Character Size/Type Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING or DATE/TIME When CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER is touched, the Character Size/Type Selection Screen will be displayed. PAGE NUMBERING funct ion OOK

JApplication Select character type / size Cési LStemp/Overla! CHARACTER SIZE Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the previous screen. 10-56

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet/Cover Insertion has been already selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to print the page number oninsertions, or skip them from the page count. PAGE NUHBERING function BOOK Perte Select cover/insert page to print Œ y COVER Print ON es) F r int ON Print OFF _—_ F = . Print OFF Print OFF Skip page ï ea Wfe live | Print OFF Skip page Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen. 10-57

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the page (WATERMARK), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over the scanned image (WATERMARK NUMBERING). Specification for WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING © Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay, Overay Memory A Aoo1100 001/100 001/100 = Z ob 00 420

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

Sheet/Cover { Non-image ÉT AUT image Insert le Chapter (EÏH) Image Shift JE] The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed. 10-58

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

Touch WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING, as desired. Do cation SECTE Stanp/Over lay function 1 Stamp/Overlay

Application and press OK L Stamp/Overlay | [FOR YOUR

T ET CONFIDENTIAL MENU

: © LIGHT PLEASE REPLY

| FOR YOUR URGENT COMMENTS Touch to highlight the desired watermark key. If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. To select the density and colour of the watermark, touch DENSITY or COLOUR to display the popup menu, touch the desired density/colour key to highlight it, then touch OK. Select desired HATERHARK function D 50%

ONOT COPY | © NORMAL DENSITY

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) enr rest des led HATERMARK funct ion 1 Stamp/Overlay CHARACTER À MAGENTA Touch OK. The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 Hinr See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. CZ HT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4 to p. 3-9.

À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 10-61

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in the job. Specification for Overlay © Store mode is automatically selected. © Incompatible Conditions: ACS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, STAMP, SET NUMBERING,

WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING

Originals scanned Copies in Overlay mode 2nd and later 1st scanned original ABCD

Mere EE] Chapter (EH ; 5 É Image Shift ALES OE [ALL CLEAR] | CANCEL } ok ] The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed. 10-62

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (continued)

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. The Store mode is automatically selected.

6. Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Basic

Screen. APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. Z. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CZ HT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

9. Press [START] to scan.

The original image will be scanned into memory.

10. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. 11.Press [START] to scan.

12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all originals.

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (continued)

13. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.

10-64 À CAUTION When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recall the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job. Specification for Overlay Memory © Incompatible Conditions with Image Store: Using RADF, ACS, 1»2,2k2,2B1, AMS, Reserve Mode, Interrupt Mode, Selecting Output Mode, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp, Overlay © Incompatible Conditions with Output: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Face Up, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp, Overlay ABCD + Ce) Store in HDD Overlaying image Output ABCD Recall overlaying image Output Recalled image Overlay originals Copies in Overlay Memory mode Î1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. M Reminder! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 10-65

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HD (Overlay Memon)) (continued)

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function FILE EDIT Image Shift The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.

{NUMBER ING| (srane couour sEuëtT] The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will be displayed. Proceed to step 9, when recalling only the stored image.

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD/Overlaying Image Stored in HDD {Overlay Memory) (continued)

Enter the desired image name. Application 1 Stamp/Overlay Use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 characters. The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct name. If the image name is correct, touch OK. The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed. Select the desired copy conditions. CZ HT The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image name has been already used. See p. 10-69 for details. Position the overlaying original on the platen glass. Q DETAILS The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image. Press [START] to scan. The Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed. Please wait Noy storing data to HDD 10-67

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HD (Overlay Memon)) (continued) Q DETAILS To stop scanning, press [STOP]. The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing function is completed. To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.

9. Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch OK.

(elle) [x The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Q DETAILS: Image Delete Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image name using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch IMAGE DELETE.

10. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.

11. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released. Set the desired conditions on the Basic Screen.

12. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CZ HINT See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.

13. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. 14.Press [START] to scan.

15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for all originals.

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD/Overlaying Image Stored in HDD {Overlay Memory) (continued) À CAUTION When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandiled paper will occur. Q DETAILS: Popup Menu for Name Duplication If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch YES to enter a new name, or NO to create a duplicate name. application 2 Stemp/Over ay If the popup menu with OK key is displayed, the entered name is duplicated. Touch OK, then enter a new name. application 2 Stemp/Over ay Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No. 41 of the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-37 - p. 14-42. 10-69

To Use Web Utilities When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, a web browser on the PC provides the following functions. 1 Main Page Displays the job in progress, service call, and machine information. 2 Job Status Displays the current and previous job status. 3 Environment Setup Makes the Key Operator setting concerning network environment and E.K.C. function. Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 / Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using the web browser.

1. Tumonthe power to the PC connected with the machine

over a network. Q DETAILS Contact your network manager for details on the network system.

2. Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu.

Ge 1x (œ y Type the Intemet address of a document or folder, and + À Intemet Explorer will open i for vou. Qper: | El 1 Open as Web Folder

3. Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machinel]),

then click on [OK]. Q DETAILS Ask your network manager for the IP address or host name of the machine. 11-2

To Use Web Utilities (continued) The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed. |'Ele Edt View Favorites Tods Help Lex + > - © À À Qserh Grove Gustoy | SM-E% (Pagaress [E1 retp:1110.9.0.97100form index en.hel Status Print ready goshead WEBSERVER| The Main Page informs you of the current job status of the machine and the maintenance item, if required. Service call JAM Paper supply Toner supply Staple cartridge supply Complete Job Non Complete Job Finisher tray full Dispose of Trimmer waste basket Dispose ot Punch waste basket PM call Q DETAILS + Click on [REFRESHI] in the Web Utilities window to update the information. + The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

2. Click on the 8050 image.

DB Et Men Frrote Jo tb Les - © - Q D À! Gent Givet Gate SM - © > [ASE re0:1/10.9.0 970 en rent Status Print ready The window now provides the paper tray configuration, engine configuration, and option information. Q DETAILS The same information will be provided also in the Job Status window. See p. 11-5. Paper Tray Configuration Paper Tray | Sie | Type | Stams Mana Traÿ [11x17 Normal Trayl [A4 T2 [as Pages In Tray Tray3 [A4 Normal [Paper Ia Traÿ Engine Configuration Option Information Machine Type [2050 Finisher Type FS-215 Comuy Code _||Ewope Trimmer Type TU-109 Display Language _|Engtsh Sheet Feeder Not Mount ERDH Capacity(MB) 64 Punch Not Mount ERDH Available(%) 100 : m Total Count ADU lount Copy Count DF Type DF-319 Printer Count HDD Capacity(GB) 19 Manochrame Count |131 HDD Available(%) 0 Monocolour Count 219 LCT Type LT-211 Colour Count (7006 Total PM Count [13713 Developer Count Drum Cou Q DETAILS Click on [REFRESHI in the window to update the information.

To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) Follow the procedure below to display the current job status, job list including reserved jobs and job information, and information on up to 16 previous jobs.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

2. Click on [Job Status].

Be ER Yen Favotes Iook Eee Eu + - QD À] Good Gérer Gisy | De & M: D > (AE [E) reu0:1/10.9.0 97jgerormpjbetans en. art Konica sé Web Utilities Engine Status Print ready Jobs Waiting Remain Time(Minute) mA) End Job List Job Empty Job Status Job List (Number of Job |0 The current job status, number of jobs in waiting, and remaining time before the print job is completed. Q DETAILS Clicking on the 8050 image will display the machine information. See p. 11-4. Q DETAILS Click on [REFRESHI] to update the information.

To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) (continued)

3. Display the current job or reserved job information.

Click on the desired [Job Priority No.] under the “Job List”. The information on the specified job will appear in the second “Job List” area. BAM) Enéx (RE Q DETAILS

Jobs Waiting Remain Time(Mimute) Job Empty Job Status Number of Job .0 Job Status Job Information ID : 1 Job Number 1 Number of Pages [1 Print Quantity 1 If no print job or reserved job exists, “Job Empty” will be displayed in the first “Job List” area. 4, Display the previous job information. Click on the desired [Job 1D No.] under the “Job Status”. The information on the specified previous job will appear in the second “Job Status” area. Q DETAILS Number of Job | Job Status ob Information ID : 1 Jeb Number Number of Pages Print Quant Output Time Job Atribute Copur Job Status Job end successfily Current print quantity count |1 Current page number |1 Remaining Time ü Job Number Number of Pages |1 Print Quantiey 1 Output Time 0 Job Attribute Job Status If no job has been printed after the machine has been powered on, “Jobs don't

Setting E-Mail Transmission Function Make the Key Operator setting concerning the network environment using the web browser. For details of the E-Mail Transmission Setting, refer to p. 14-8.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

2. Click on [Environment Setup].

Setting E-Mail Transmission Function (continued)

4. Make the setting.

Enter the IP address of the mail server, IP address of the DNS server (if needed), time difference, and E-mail address to be informed of the machine status. Click on the check box of the desired transmission item. [Be Et de Frots Ie te FE Lémk» >: O D @l Ones Drome Gun 880 DAME Pr 10 à 0 promet eme Des im E-Mail transmission setting Œ-Mail Transmission) Sending Setting F Def 25, Méormem 1, Marin 92999) FF mmæf ecen8 Dim 30 seconds, Mwimum 5 mime) Qécmen: 64 Charatters) I Non Conglet Job (SEEN) 204 te mdlte Manager

wear Click on [Apply] to complete the setting and return to the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Reset] will void the setting and restore the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Sending test] will send a test mail to the manager. 11-8

Setting E.K.C. Function Make the following Key Operator settings concerning the E.K.C. function using the web browser on a PC. + E.K.C. Data Add (see step 4.) Add a new E.K.C. data (password, name, and copy limit) to the E.K.C. list. + E.K.C. Data List (see step 5.) Change or delete the E.K.C. data (password, name, or copy limit) in the list, or reset the counters. + E.K.C. Function Setting (see step 6.) Specify the following E.K.C. function settings. Switching the E.K.C.: ON/OFF Effect when the copy limit is reached: Immediately / After job / Warning E.K.C. password: 8 digits / under 8 digits E.K.C. password input timing: Auto reset timer/ Complete job Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer): Accept / Reject Q DETAILS The above settings can also be made on the machine itself, except for the Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer) setting. Some settings may require operations on the machine. Refer to pages 14-12 and 14-37.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

Go museum 77) TR co sou Scenes me Cniirete ts opinion _] est] ER C Gino rt ram Enter the following items to register a new E.K.C. data, then click on [Registration]. Number: Automatically assigned Password: 8 digits max. Name: 8 characters max. Limit: 999,999 copies max. Q DETAILS To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset]. To cancel adding a new E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. Q DETAILS: Error Message + A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message. However, duplicating a password is possible using the Key Operator setting. Refer to p. 14-15. + The Name entry box accepts letters (capital letters only), numbers, and four symbols: (, ), -, and /. Any other symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the window. + Max. 1,000 E.K.C. entries can be registered. An error message will be displayed if the above limit is exceeded. + An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please click on [Registration] while the machine is in an idle state. 11-11

Setting E.K.C. Function (continued) The registered content will be displayed in the window. The new E.K.C. data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations.

Lot + + © D @| Dr revus Gr De SEE > an en ele Dee Regstered as fotous

ER C co reg see CZ HIT The “Another user count” in the list indicates the count accumulated for the jobs performed by non-registered users. This data cannot be edited other than resetting the counter. 11-12

Setting E.K.C. Function (continued) To change Password, Name, or Limit: (1) Click on the number of the data to be edited. Bots Le 1e Ch De DE SPA Nr Des ln te 29997) Gr Spa [Et 1 ne 299995) Poe & Canon tee T° Separete set PE 4 Poeme ja ER C Sete net mm (2) Change the password, name, or limit, as desired. For details in entering procedure, refer to p. 11-11. (3) Click on [Registration]. Q DETAILS To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset]. To cancel editing the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. Q DETAILS: Error Message See “Details” on p. 11-11 if an error message is displayed after clicking on [Registration]. 11-13

Setting E.K.C. Function (continued) The edited content will be displayed in the window. The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations. D TE EE ss Regstered as fous ER C Guen set pen Click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. To reset E.K.C. nt: (1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data of the counter to be cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on [SelectAIf|. (2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the “Count reset selected item(s).” (3) Click on [Applyi. Joe Ge nee rate Da tb Ca | one = : © D @| Bsen Œrmons Gun [Gr @ D - 0 > Ag er venu 22 spam annirimemrmen TI éœ lun EK.C data list

ER C fancbee sg eu (4) Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero. The message “Setting was changed” will be displayed. Lee 6e de Pots 1m 1e CH Jomesr L'Emut Coramte Gi LA S © E > CE on en Je in EK.C data list Setting was changed ER C Soon rein mem Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a counter has not been reset due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in anidle state when you click on [Apply. Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window. 11-15

Setting E.K.C. Function (continued) (4) Click on [Apply] to immediately delete the data. The message “Setting was deleted” will be displayed. Le Et de Faune Jo Le [EI Loeb + 0 + © D) © Dseuh Corentin tes [Gr 6 * 9 > ARE) rm 0 0 promise mt des ju EK.C data list Setting was changed ER C fuctea sg nent Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], data has not been deleted due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply]. Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. Set the E.K.C. function. Click on [E.K.C. function setting] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window (see p. 11-10) or from the menu in any subsequent window. The E.K.C. Function Setting window will be displayed. Click on the radio button (white circle) of the desired selection item(s) so that a black dot appears in it. [me me me route 1e Pl | œ - : - © D | Gros Giro Cr CG @ 8 - 0 > Poe TI 66 EK.C Function Setting Click on [Apply]. The change made in the settings will be transmitted immediately for the user operations. Q DETAILS To restore the previous setting, click on [Reseñ. To cancel the E.K.C. function setting, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item. 11-17

Setting E.K.C. Function (continued) Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a setting has not been completed due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply. Fo ju 5e [ CORTE TN 2iemn BK C function vemag mea Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. 11-18

Setting Scan Transmission Function Make the Key Operator setting concerning the transmission of the scanned image data using the web browser. For details of the Scan Transmission Setting, contact your service representative. Specifications for Scan Transmission Setting 9 The Scan Transmission Setting is available only when the IP-901 Printer Controller is installed in the machine.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

Click on [Environment Setup]. go N , Display the Scan Transmission Setting window. Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply. De ER Den FROM Leo LP Est + - QD À Os were Chat D: 8 M: >

Web Utilities EX Environment Setup ( ES Œey Operator Password) EE nee Input Password | EE The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed. Click on [Scan transmission setting]. Be ER Yen Fivotes Joos Hep sui» - Q D À] Gsert rot Gen DS Bi - © > AL 0:10 2.0 puma eve Konica & Web Utilities Environment Setup Environment Setup u The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed. Q DETAILS The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the window only when the IP-901 Printer Controller (Fiery S300 50C-K) is connected to the machine. 11-19

Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued) 4, Register the E-Mail, HDD, and FTP, as required. CZ HIT For details of this setting, refer to the instruction manual of the printer controller. Je GE Me Fois Les Eee [I L'état + QD À] Oroutr Crete Der LG: 3 8 * D > D no 2 roman ons desk Scan transmission setting Emvail Registration (Japanese is not available) Figatatn | _ Enr et HDD Registration (Japanese is mot availahle) teen 18 Char) <4-digt [0001-0009D Q DETAILS + The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, if entered. + The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 4-digit number. For example, entering [1] will be registered as [00011]. Click on [Registration] to complete the entry. The registered content will be displayed. [Be Et ve Frotes Jods be Les - © : Q D G| Gore Gimme Our Dr m:E ef) var 40:90 57puomipscn ne Regstered as follows RE : > su] Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. 11-20

Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued)

5. Display the Entry List.

Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.

6. Change the registered contents.

Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the entry name to be changed. The window for changing the selected item will be displayed. Je Ge Me Fate Loos Eee E

C En on dant = ar qéCu y pe=EraC ares és ju Email Registration (Japanese is not available) D Du 18 Chr) Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration]. The registered content will be displayed. Ts ui en ee Li Lormt ++: © D @| Dur Ereum Guer SH > | Def) vou 0 promeen enom des ke Begiered as tous EE age ES si] Click on [Back] to return to the Entry List window. 11-21

Setting Scan Transmission Function (continued)

7. Delete the registered contents.

Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the check box in the “Delete” column of the item to be deleted, then click on [Delete]. If all the items are to be deleted, click on [SelectAll], then click on [Delete]. The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed. Q DETAILS Click on the check box again to release the selection. Ge GR de From eh bee out » + : © D ©] Que route Dur Dr SEE > DE) neo 0 rome mme Dies Email Delete

Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes]. Click on [Back] on the web browser to return to the Entry List window. 11-22

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on the PC, then return the file to the machine (import). + E.K.C. data (max. 1,000 files) + Three Scan Transmission Setting data E-mail data (max. 96 files) HDD (Box No.) (max. 48 files) FTP (FTP server address) (max. 12 files) Q DETAILS + The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned to the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you have two or more machines. The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch processing, can be edited efficiently and returned to the machine. + The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file and transmitted separately. + For details of E.K.C. data, see p. 14-14. + For details of Scan Transmission Setting data, see p. 14-48.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

Click on [Environment Setup]. . Display the Setting File Import/Export window. Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply. go N De Et Ven Frote Jos bb Es a CEE Pipe rentes Grau | Dr & M: © > Web Utilities Environment Setup Key Operator Password) Environment Setup —— Ing Pasrword) PE | p-) 11-23

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued) The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed. Click on ISetting data Import/Expori. Web Utilities

The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed. Enter “ekc” in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in the Password text box, then click on [OK]. Web Utilities Environment Setup DEN : es PRET LETCS IT Save is pamedin ous paasmadit CE = The Setting File Import/Export window will be displayed.

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued) Q DETAILS The data format cannot be changed from “TAB separated.” Confirm that the radio button heading “Save this file to disk” is marked in the File Download dialog box, then click on [OK]. Import fie Domniosd -You transmit a file and can 5 - If push import button, a set

Irport … You have chosen 1 dourinsd a le fon ha caen. ne fm 10.112129 Export CE _ ce | asie In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the machine setting file, then click on [Save!. Q DETAILS The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the data to be exported, changing the name if desired. + ekc_tab.txt (E.K.C. data) + _ip_email.txt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data) *_ip_hdd.ixt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data) +_ip_ftp.txt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data) Import rent Ce Fr If push import butt -Ples e à dat EXC data(TAB separat, | % Q DETAILS: Error Message The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. lf an error message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine operation is completed. A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed. Click on [Close]. 11-25

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued)

5. Edit the machine setting file.

The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor or Table Editor. À new setting file can also be created according to the specifications for each file type. See p. 11-27 for details.

6. Import the machine setting file.

Click on [Browse] to designate the machine setting file to be imported, then click on [Imporfi. PO EETETEEES Setting data Import’Export Import The result message will be displayed when the registration is completed. Ele Got Vew Favtes Iods Lab Get - QD Bout Gros Gen BG: SE-B > eee) ruc-/10.9.0.v7/p0tomparanerans een Setting data Import Export 2 EKC settings were registered. [Entry List Q DETAILS: Error Message If the registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will be displayed as follows. + Can't transfer data (The machine is busy) Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is completed. + The data cannot be recognized Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. + Data size is too large Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes. + The data cannot be registered Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file. See p. 11-27 for details. Check if the file entries are already over the limit. 11-26

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued) e} DETAILS: To Edit the Machine Setting File + Save the file as a text. + Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #EKC_TAB) + Aline should be 300 bytes or less. + The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less. + The line that begins with “#’ is a comment. ex. Machine setting file of an E.K.C. data #EKC_TAB #PASSWORDNAME LIMIT 00003636 ——-ADMIN 100000

36363636 -ADADMIN 100000 12341234 ———-HOHO 100000 Q DETAILS: Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type E.K.C. data setting file: Begin the file with #EKC_TAB. Max. 1,000 files can be edited. A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, and LIMIT, separated by a tab. Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PASSWORD. Use numbers, alphabets (capital letters only), and four symbols: (, ), -, and /'only to specify NAME. + Use up to 6 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 - 999,999). E-mail data setting file: + Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL. + Max. 96 files can be edited. + A line should include ENTRY NAME and E-MAIL ADDRESS, being separated by a tab. + ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + E-MAIL ADDRESS should be 60 bytes or less. HDD data setting file: + Begin the file name with #IP_HDD. + Max. 48 files can be edited. + A line should include ENTRY NAME and BOX NUMBER, being separated by a tab. + ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + Use up to 4 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a BOX NUMBER.

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (continued) FTP data setting file: + Begin the file name with #IP_FTP. + Max. 12 files can be edited. + A line should include PROFILE NAME, HOST ADDRESS, FILE PATH, LOGIN, and PASSWORD, being separated by a tab. PROFILE NAME should be 18 bytes or less. HOST ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less. FILE PATH should be 96 bytes or less. LOGIN should be 47 bytes or less. PASSWORD should be 31 bytes or less.

Paper Information This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. -* Tray 1,2 and 3 (Main body tray) + LCT (LT-211 Large Capacity Tray) + Multi-sheet bypass tray Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies. ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) Finisher (FS-115/FS-215) Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-110) Punching Kit (PK-120) Trimmer Unit (TU-109) Exit tray (for the machine without Finisher) Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each. Paper Weight Paper Trays Weight Tray 1, 2, and 3 64g/m°? - 209g/m° (Main body tray) The tray number for paper weight is specified in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m, - 7Ag/n 2: 75g/me U 80g/m, 3: 81g/m? - 105g/m? 4: 106g/m? ” 162g/m° 5: 163g/m? - 209g/m° LCT 64g/m°? - 256g/m° The tray number for paper weight is specified in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m, - 7Ag/n 2: 75g/me U 80g/m, 3: 81g/m? - 105g/m? 4: 106g/m? ” 162g/m° 5: 163g/me - 209g/me 6: 210g/m? - 256g/m° Multi-sheet bypass 64g/m? - 256g/m° tray The tray number for paper weight can be selected on the Type/Size popup menu of Basic Screen, and the popup menu is specifed in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m - 74g/m2 2: 75g/me U 80g/m, 3: 81g/m? - 105g/m? 4: 106g/m? ” 162g/m° 5: 163g/me : 209g/m 6: 210g/m? - 256g/m° 12-2

Paper Information (continued) Paper Trays Weight ADU 64 g/m? - 209 g/m? Finisher 50 g/m? - 256 g/m? 64 g/m? - 105 g/m? for Staple-sort/Stitch & Fold/ Three Fold mode Cover sheet feeder 64 g/m? - 200 g/m? 64 g/m? - 170 g/m? for Manual punching 64 g/m? - 105 g/m? for Manual three fold Punching kit 64 g/m? - 170 g/m? Trimmer unit 164 g/m? - 105 g/m? Exit tray 64 g/m? - 209 g/m? Q DETAILS Some 170 g/m paper types may not be punched easily. CZ His + See p. 14-21 for Paper Type setting of Tray 1,2, 3 or LCT. + See p. 3-18 for Paper Type setting of Mulü-sheet bypass tray. 12-3

Paper Information (continued) Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity 12-4 Paper Trays Capacity Tray 1,2, and 3 (Main body tray) 500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) LOT (LT-211) 2,500 sheets (90 g/m? paper) Multi-sheet bypass tray 250 sheets (90 g/m? paper) 1 sheet each for offset master, Intermediate paper or Label. Transparency film or ink-jet paper is unavailable. Equipments Capacity ADU Unlimited Finisher (FS-115/ Secondary (sub) tray 200 sheets (90 g/m? paper) FS-215) Primary (main) tray Non-sort mode (90 g/m? paper) 500 sheets (A5, A5R, B6R) 3,000 sheets (A4, A4R, B5R) (FS-115) 2,500 sheets (A4, A4R, B5R, 8.5”x11”, 8.5"x11”R) (FS-215) 1,500 sheets (A3, B4, 12x18”, 11x17”, 8.5"x14”) Sort/Group mode (90 g/m? paper) 3,000 sheets (8.5”x11”, 8.5"x11”R, A4, A4R, B5R) (FS-115) 2,500 sheets (8.5”x11”, 8.5"x11”R, A4, A4R, B5R) (FS-215) 1,500 sheets (12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, A3, B4) Staple-sort mode (90 g/m? paper) 1,000 sheets (Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See p. 12-5 for details) Finisher (FS-215) Booklet tray 100 sheets (A3, B4, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”) Fold: 33 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 x 3 = 99 sheets, 396 pages) Stitch&Fold: 20 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 = 100 sheets, 400 pages) 5 sets for 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 20 = 100 sheets, 400 pages) 75 sheets (A4R, 8.5”x11"R) Fold: 25 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 3 = 75 sheets, 300 pages) Stitch&Fold: 12 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet (15 x 5 = 75 sheets, 300 pages) 3 sets for 25-sheet-folded booklet (3 x 25 = 75 sheets, 300 pages)

• Maximum number of folded sheet is 3 for Fold mode, and 25 for Stitch&Fold mode. Cover sheet feeder (PI-110) 200 sheets (200 g/m°) or 30 mm thick for Upper/lower tray Punching kit Unlimited Trimmer unit (TU- 109) 512 sheets (90 g/m? paper) (See p. 8-16 for details) Exit tray 150 sheets (90 g/m? paper)

Paper Information (continued) Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Multi-sheet bypass tray accepts the following special paper type that cannot be loaded in the main body trays. Labels Q DETAILS When using special paper type other than the above mentioned, select Excl.A to D as the paper type in Paper type/size setting for the Multi-sheet bypass tray. To Store Copy Paper + Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper misfeed. Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage. + Do not place paper packages vertically to store. Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed. 12-8

Original Information Use the platen glass or document feeder to position originals to copy. Platen Glass Originals Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition. CZ HT See each description in this manual for copy conditions which cannot use the document feeder to scan. Unsuitable RADF Originals L 2] 3 19 ; es À

Curled, creased or Paste-ups or folded originals cut-outs Books 4 RNEZZ 5 6

Glossy or transparent originals, OHP film, Doubled, punched or Thin or thick originals art paper, cellophane stapled originals Platen Glass Original Specifications © Max. original size: 303 mm x 438 mm, sheet or book © Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30 mm © Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass HINT Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-37 to p. 14-42. À CAUTION Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured. 12-9

Original Information (continued) RADF Originals Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (RADF) to scan originals. + Normal mode + Mixed Original mode + _Z-Folded Original mode Specifications for each mode are described as follows. C2 nr Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-37 top. 14-42. Normal mode © Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5SR, A5, AR, 11x17”, 8.5”x13”, 8.5”x1 1” 9 Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m? - 200 g/m? Dulpex: 50 g/m? - 200 g/m°?

• Use Thin mode for 35 g/m° - 49 g/m° paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m? - 200 g/m? paper. O Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (90 g/m? paper) © Cuing tolerance: 10 mm or less © Original placement: Face up Mixed Original mode Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. See p. 9-6 for details. © Original size: Three types of size combination are determined by the RADF guide width. A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and A5 mixed B4, A4R, B5, B5SR, and A5 mixed B5R and A5R mixed 0 Original weight: Simplex: _ 35g/m? - 200g/m? Dulpex: 50g/m° - 200g/m°?
• Use Thin mode for 35 g/m? - 49 g/mf paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m? - 200 g/m? paper. Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (90 g/m? paper) Cuding tolerance: 10 mm or less Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-6 for details.) Q DETAILS See below for the guide width of each combination. aaû = Z 3 î & 3 Guide uide Guide width | A4 | A3 | Kid | BS | B4 | Kia || AS | A4 } Ÿ s 12-10

Original Information (continued) Z-Folded Original mode Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size detection sensor of the RADF. See p. 9-8 for details. © Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11”x177, 8.5"x13”, 8.5”x1 1” 9 Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m? - 200 g/m? Dulpex: 50 g/m? - 200 g/m?

• Use Thin mode for 35 g/m? - 49 g/m? paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m? - 200 g/m? paper. Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (90 g/m? paper) Curling tolerance: 10 mm orless Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-7 for details); orientation same as copy paper

Adding Toner When toner supply is low, the message “Please add toner” and the ADD TONER icon ([avo ronerfhdcKl) display on the touch screen. The toner colour to be supplied is indicated by an alphabet: C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), or K (black). Position original in the RADF face up Please toner [écorrous[haoo ronerlvh Acte] R 0B O0 ORIGINAL COUNT 0

FREE on PE 0002 PP 1000) à FREE 100 OUTPUT FUNCTION- THAGE ADJUÈT. ‘APPLICATION MENU OFF, ÿ) Reminder! Use the same number toner bottle as described on the label on the toner bottle cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur. toner number À | label f Add toner according to the procedure as follows. 13-2

Adding Toner (continued)

1. Loosen toner by tapping both top and bottom of the new

toner bottle on a solid surface at least five times, then shake the bottle at least five times.

2. Open the toner access door.

Adding Toner (continued)

3. Unlock and open the toner bottle cover of the empty toner bottle.

4, Partially withdraw the toner bottle, then turn it to set the “Up arrow” mark at the top.

5. Fully withdraw the toner bottle straightforward to remove the

Adding Toner (continued)

6. Remove the cap of the new toner bottle, then set the same cap to

the removed bottle. New toner bottle Empty toner bottle

7. While positioning the “Up arrow” mark at the top and aligning the

two hollow parts of the toner bottle with the salients on the bottle entrance, fully insert the new toner bottle until it locks in place. 13-5

Adding Toner (continued)

8. Close and lock the toner bottle cover, then close the toner access

door. Q DETAILS The toner botile cover cannot be locked if the toner bottle is not set in place. VAN WARNING Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. À CAUTION Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-toxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice. 13-6

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-115/215 Finisher When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Basic Screen displays the following message in the message area.

FREE Jo8 01 Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge. ÿ) Reminder! Use only the staples supplied by Konica. Please contact your service representative to purchase.

1. Open the Finisher door.

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-115/215 Finisher (continued)

3. Pull up the cartridge housing, then remove it while sliding it along

5. Insert the new cartridge into the housing.

Firmly insert the cartridge into the housing while aligning the arrow sides of both case and housing, then remove the lock tape from the cartridge. M Reminder! Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing; otherwise, the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled. 13-8

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-115/215 Finisher (continued)

6. Insert the cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail,

then push down and in to secure it in place. 13-9

Empty Waste Basket of PK-120 Punching Kit When the waste basket becomes full, “Waste basket of Punching kit is full / Please empty waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being punched even if Punch mode is selected. Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1. Open the Finisher door.

Empty Waste Basket of PK-120 Punching Kit (continued)

3. Empty the waste basket.

4, Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the Finisher door securely. 13-11

Empty Waste Basket of TU-109 Trimmer Unit When the waste basket becomes full, “Waste basket of Trimmer is full / Please empty waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being trimmed even if Trimming mode is selected. Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1. Open the trimmer front door.

Empty Waste Basket of TU-109 Trimmer Unit (continued)

3. Empty the waste basket.

4, Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the trimmer front door securely. 13-13

Exchanging Toner Recovery Box When the toner recovery box becomes full with the used toner, “Please change toner recovery box” message and an icon (#1) will be displayed on the touch screen. T-80x| Position original inthe RADF face up Please change toner recovery box

RESERVE JOB 0 ORIGINAL COUNT

{ | PLI (FULL 4 Fe { ROTATION COLGUR FE, Follow the procedure below to exchange the toner recovery box. À WARNING DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.

1. Open the toner recovery box door on the rear-right side of

Exchanging Toner Recovery Box (continued)

3. Remove the sticker on the toner recovery box, then put it on the

inlet of the used toner. door. 13-15

Cleaning Image Scanning Section In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean. Cleaning the Document Glass Raise the document cover, and clean the glass with a clean soft cloth. The glass may also clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult to clean. (I) ÿ) Reminder! Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen glass. Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly. Raise the document cover, and clean the RADF platen guide cover with a clean soft cloth. (In Q) Reminder! Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF platen guide cover. 13-16

Cleaning Image Scanning Section (continued) Cleaning the Platen Cover Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the document cover, and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth. Q) Reminder! Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen cover. 13-17

Checking Copy Count This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on the touch panel: Total counter, Full colour counter, Mono colour counter, Monochrome counter, Copier counter, Printer counter, Counter start date. Check the list, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired. To Display the Counter List Screen Î1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.

HELP F € = oHEcK NTERAUPT ACCESS PROOF cor 208 MEoRt AUTO FESET The Counter List Screen will be displayed. Counter list COUNT/CYCLE. S T 1 Number Total counter 00000000 65AF00001 Full colour counter 00000000 Mono colour counter 00000000 Monochrome counter 00000000 Copier counter 00000000 COUNTER Printer counter 00000000 L MENU Q DETAILS The Counter List Screen can be displayed even when the copying job is in progress.

Checking Copy Count (continued) To Print the Counter List Î1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.

INTERAUPT PROOF COPY The Counter List Screen will be displayed.

3. Touch the desired tray key to select the paper size.

The Counter list will be printed out, and the Management list mode will be released automatically.

Periodic Maintenance After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Periodic Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance. When preventive maintenance is due, a message and the two icons ( x Ÿ PMCaLL |) will prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance: Position original inthe RADF face up Please call service for PM

FREE 01 F FRE Lo 00! FREE 308 To Check the PM Counter Follow the procedure below to check the PM counter to estimate the time when Periodic Maintenance is due. Î1. Press [P(COUNTER)] on the control panel.

INTERAUPT. PROOF COPY The Counter List Screen will be displayed. 13-20

Periodic Maintenance (continued)

INTERAUPT PROOF COPY The PM counter will appear under the Printer counter on the screen. C2 HT To print the Counter list including the PM counter, see p. 13-19.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 13-21

An Outline of the Key Operator Mode The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine performance, and service information, modifying machine settings as well as controlling user activity for billing purposes. A unique 4-digit Key Operator password is normally set by your service representative at installation. 1f the unique code is not set by your service representative, the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed; a Key Operator password will not be required. To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish a unique Key Operator password, and keep it in a confidential file. How to Access the Key Operator Mode Î1. Press [HELP] on the control panel to display the Help Screen.

Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Key Operator password. Touch OK'to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter Key Operator passuord Key operator password(4) Q DETAILS The entered Key Operator password will not be displayed on the screen. If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. If the Key Operator password is not valid, check with your service representative. 14-2

An Outline of the Key Operator Mode (continued)

4. Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as

described on the following pages. Key operator node menu Select one of following itens | 5 Lock/delete job memory 10 Control panel adjustment F PREVIOUS SCREEN Key operator mode nenu Select one of following itens at Tray auto select setting 16 Finisher adjustment É12 Power save setting 17 Front & Back Density setting 18 Memory switch setting 18 Scan transmission setting 14 Machine management list print 19 Non-image area erase setting 15 Call remote centre [20 AE adjustment Key operator mode nenu Select one of following itens F PREVIOUS SCREEN Q DETAILS + To display menus [11] to [20] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower arrow key to scroll. To return the previous menu, touch the upper arrow key. + The menus [21] to [25] will be displayed and available by service setting. Contact your service representative, if desired.

5. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to exit the Key Operator Mode.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

[1] System Initial Setting Set the following initial conditions of the copier. Date & Time setting: Current date and time, Summer time, Time difference Language select setting: Language used in LCD IP address setting: IP address to be accessed from PC, Line speed setting E-mail transmission setting: E-mail address to be informed of machine trouble or request for supplies. [1] Date & Time Setting Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference. O Default setting: Summer time off System Initial Setting Menu Screen Date & Time Setting Screen Systen Initial setting Date à Lire setting Procedure 1 qouch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu creen. 2 Touch [1] Date & Time setting to display the Date & Time Setting Screen. 3 Adjust the time. The time indicated by the copier is displayed in the upper line and ordered by date, month, year and time (in 24-hour expression). (1)_In the lower line, the highlighted section can be changed by using the keypad on the screen.

2) Touch SET to move the highlighted section to the number to be changed.

4 Set the Summer time. The Summer time is initially deactivated. To activate the summer time (Daylight Savings Time) function, touch Summer time to highlight it. The Present time will gain an hour.

[1] System Initial Setting (continued) 5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference information at the same time when E-mail is received. To set this function, follow the procedure below. (1) Touch Diff. time setting'o display the Difference in Time Setting Screen. (2) Touch +<->- to display “+” when the local time is earlier than the Universal time, or “-” when the local time is later. (3) Use the keypad on the screen to enter the time difference between the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area. (e.g. Enter “- 0600” for 6 hours later than the Universal time.) (4) Touch OKio return to the Date & Time Setting Screen. 6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL. 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.

[1] System Initial Setting (continued) [2] Language Select Setting Select the language used in the LCD. © Default setting: English System Initial Setting Menu Screen Language Selection Screen Procedure

OO BON qouch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu creen. Touch [2] Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen. Select the desired English mode. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN (to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.

[1] System Initial Setting (continued) [3] IP Address Setting When using the server function, this setting is required to enable a PC to gain access to this machine. Set the line speed, if required. System Initial Setting Menu Screen NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems. IP Address Setting Screen (next page) Line Speed Setting Screen 1 1 QU Procedure

gun [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu creen. Touch [3] IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen. Make the required setting. (1) Touch to highlight the address key on the left. To scroll to the next page, touch the arrow key at the lower left corner on the screen. (2) Enter the address numbers using the screen keypad. (3) Touch SET to fix the numbers, or touch RESET to clear. Touching SET shifts the cursor to the right. Customize the line speed.

1) Touch Line speed setting to display the Line Speed Setting Screen.

2) Touch the desired key to highlight it.

(3) Touch OKto restore the IP Address Setting Screen. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-7

[1] System Initial Setting (continued) [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting When the machine requires troubleshooting or maintenance such as paper or toner supply, this setting allows several network PCs to be informed of the current machine status by E-mail. The IP address of the mail server of the local network, E- mail address of the machine manager and of others to be informed can be set. The following information items are provided. + Service call + PM call + _Finisher tray full + JAM + Complete job + Dispose of waste basket + Paper supply + Non complete job + Toner supply + Staple cartridge supply NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems. System Initial Setting Menu Screen E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen y] on setting Procedure 1 qouch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu creen. 2 Touch /4] E-Mail Transmission Setting to display the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. 3 Specify the IP address of the mail server. IP Address Setting Screen (1) Touch [1] IP address setting to x J display the IP Address Setting Screen. (2) Enter the IP address of the mail ES address in your network using screen keypad. Touch SET to fix the numbers, or touch RESET to clear. Touching SET shifts the cursor to the right. (3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen.

[2] Copier Initial Setting Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on, when Auto Reset timer or Power Saver is operated, when the EKC password is entered, when the key counter is set, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed. Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet Energy Star requirements: Colour Mode: Full colour Copy Mode: 1-1 Paper Size: APS Lens Mode: 1:1 Output Mode: Offset sort NOTE: The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long-range effect of the change. Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [2] Copier initial setting to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen. 2 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings. Touch RADF to select or deselect it. NOTE: The machine will restore the initial settings specified as above unless the Memory switch No. 4 “Job memory (30) auto recall” is turned ON with the Job memory No. 30 registered. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.

[3] User Setting Mode Set the user-set magnification ratio. [1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting The preset and userset ratios available on the Basic Screen are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size. Normally, users are allowed to change the three USERSETS in the bottom line on the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. The preset keys in the top and middle lines can be programmed in 2-5 DIP SW mode for special purposes, but ordinarily, it is recommended that they remain unchanged. Default setting: USERSET1: 4.000 USERSET2: 2.000 USERSET3;: 0.500 User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [3] User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] User lens mode ratio setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. 3 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.250 - 4.000, using the keypad. If a ratio under 0.250 is entered, 0.250 will be displayed. If a ratio over 4.000 is entered, 4.000 will be displayed. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-11

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling EKC password accounts. When the EKC is activated, copying can be performed only after a valid EKC password is entered. This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit copier access to only authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set. Copy quantity and copy limits for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen. If EKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. The following EKC settings can be made by the Key Operator: [1] E.K.C. data edit: Assign an account number to an individual user or a group, and specify an EKC password, name, and copy limit for each. The registered EKC data will be listed on the screen, allowing you to change the data, reset the copy count, or even delete the individual account. [2] E.K.C. all count reset: Clear the copy count for all accounts. [3] E.K.C. function setting: Turn the EKC function on or off, and set conditions to stop immediately, stop after job is completed or display a warning message when copy limit is reached. [4] Scanner function setting: Turn the EKC function on or off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This setting is available even if the print controller is not installed in the machine. 14-12

Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required. Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK io display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. NOTES: 1 The EKC master key code will be specified by your service representative and should be kept secret by the Key Operator. 2 lfaninvalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. 3 Touch CANCEL on the EKC Master Key Code Screen to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. Select the desired EKC function, and make settings as required. & exit the EKC mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on EKC Setting Menu creen. The Key Operator Mode Screen will be restored. 14-13

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [1] E.K.C. Data Edit Use this setting to display the list of copy, printer, or scanner count and limit for each account, to change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of the individual account. © EKC No. Designated by Key Operator © EKC Password: Unique 8-digit numeric code programmed by Key Operator for user © User Name: Max. 8 characters © Limit: Limit target, Count 0 to 999,999 copies, Permission for use EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC Data Edit Screen Tr NAT Dr PRINT ER SCANNER um COURT DOUÉ ODAMAMAA 0007 ODAMAAAA onoor unir |] permission goooo2 | FROHIELT DOS ODASAAAA D nonoot DOS ODAMAMAA 0010 ODAMAMAA

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) Procedure 1 Di splay the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-18. 2 Touch [1] E.K.C. data edit. The EKC Data Edit Screen will be displayed. NOTE: The EKC Data Edit Screen provides three sorts of EKC data; copier, printer, and scanner. Touch COPY, PRINTER, or SCANNER to display the desired screen. To change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of an individual account, follow the procedure for each as described below. To Add EKC Data:

) Select the desired machine mode, then touch Add on the EKC Data Edit Screen. The EKC Data Add Screen will be displayed. ) Note that the Password key is highlighted on the screen. Enter the password by using the touch screen keypad. Max. 8 digits can be specified. ) Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the desired name using the touch screen keypad. Max. 8 characters can be specified. ) Touch Limit to display the EKC Limit Setting popup menu. Select COPY or PRINTER, then select Common set or Separate set, as desired. Select Common set to specify a common limit for all copying jobs. Select Separate set to specify a limit separately for colour copies and monochrome copies. ) Specify the desired limit using control panel keypad. Max. 6 digits (999,999 copies) can be specified. ) Select PERMIT or PROHIBIT to enable or disable copying jobs in each mode. If PROHIBIT is selected, copying job cannot be made in that mode. ) Touch OKto return to the EKC Data Add Screen. NOTES: 1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering the valid one. ) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number. When a password is duplicated: The Password Dubplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE: If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC passwords. When a name is duplicated: The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name. (9) 1f any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored. To Change EKC Data: (1) Touch A or w key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be changed, then touch Change. The EKC Data Change Screen will be displayed. 14-15

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) (2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it, then enter new data by using the touch screen keypad. Password: 8 digits max. (See note 1.) Name: 8 characters max. (See note 2.) Limit: 999,999 copies max. / Limit Target / Permission for use NOTES: 1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering the valid one. (3) Touch OK'to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number. When a password is duplicated': The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE: If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC passwords. When a name is duplicated: The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name. (4) If any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored. To Delete EKC Data: (1) Touch A or Y key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be deleted, then touch Delete. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch YES to delete, or NOto cancel. To Clear EKC Count: (1) Touch A or w key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired EKC data, then touch Count Reset. The Reset Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch the desired colour mode key to clear the copy count of the selected mode. Delete Confirmation Screen Reset Confirmation Screen 3 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Data Edit Screen to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [2] E.K.C. AII Count Reset Reset the count for all EKC accounts. EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC All Count Reset Screen Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-18. 2 Touch [2] E.K.C. all count reset. The EKC All Count Reset Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch YES to reset all counters to zero and to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch NO to cancel. Touching PREVIOUS SCREEN will also cancel this function and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-17

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [31 E.K.C. Function Setting Use this function to turn EKC On or Off and to select whether the copier will stop at the time the count limit is reached, or after the current copy job is completed. NOTE: If EKC Off is selected on the machine with this function previously activated, copying operation will become available without entering an EKC password, while the counting function will be suspended. EKC Setting Menu Screen Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-18. 2 Touch [3] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Function Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Offto de-activate EKC. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Select the desired machine condition when the count limit is reached. The selected key will be highlighted. Touch Immediatelyto stop the machine at once when the copy limit is reached. In this case, copy conditions selected for the current job will be cleared. To continue the job using the same user password, change the copy limit of the password or clear the copy count. Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed, when copy limit is reached. Copying job will be unavailable with the message “Copy limit reached” displayed on the screen. Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached. The message “Copy limit reached” will be displayed on the screen, while copying job can be continued. 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to cancel. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN (to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [4] Scanner Function Setting Use this function to turn EKC On or Off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This setting is available even if the machine is not equipped with the optional IP-901 Print Controller. EKC Setting Menu Screen Scanner Function Setting Screen Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-18. 2 Touch [4] Scanner function setting. The Scanner Function Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Offto de-activate EKC. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to cancel. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-19

[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed using Job Memory function. Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen Procedure

qouch [5] Lock/delete job memory to display the Lock/Delete Job Memory creen. To lock/unlock a Job memory: (1) Touch the key on the left side of the desired Job number. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired Job number, if required. (2) The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is locked. The previously locked Job will be unlocked when selected, and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear. NOTE: The settings of a locked Job cannot be changed. To delete a Job memory: (1) Touch the Job number key you want to delete. The selected key will be highlighted. (2) Touch Delete. Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Job memory. NOTE: A locked job can also be deleted, with the lock on it released at the same time. Once deleted, the programs cannot be restored. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 14-20

[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set [1] Paper Type / Special Size Set Use this function to indicate a specific paper type and weight, or to specify a special paper size for main body tray keys on the Basic Screen. This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray. Key Operator Mode Screen Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen setting Paper Type Setting Screen

(Main Body Trays) Ing Special Size Setting Screen (STD size) tre re setting Cicrnu ) (en 4 Special Size Setting Screen (STD size (special) Ling Special Size Setting Screen (Non STD size NOTE: Service setting is required to use the paper types Excl. A to D. Contact your service representative, if desired. Procedure 1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] Paper type / Special size set The Paper Type Setting Screen will be displayed. 14-21

[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set (continued) 3 Specify paper type and weight. (1) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. (2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the tray key. 4 Specify special size.

1) Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the

Special Size Setting Screen. ) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. ) Touch a paper size key to specity a paper size for the selected tray. + Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key. + Select STD size (special) to display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired size. + Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The selected tray key will indicate “SPECIAL” instead of the entered numeric value. + Select Wide size paper to display the popup menu to show available wide paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired wide size. Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position. Then, touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the actual paper size using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The entered number should fall within the range from the standard size of the selected wide size, to a maximum of 330 mm x 487 mm. NOTE: When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to input the actual paper size to be used.

5 Touch OK on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN io return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-22

[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set (continued) [2] Paper Type Set (Bypass) Use this function to specify six combinations of paper type and weight for the Multi- sheet bypass tray. Specified combinations will be used when selecting Bypass on the Basic Screen. Key Operator Mode Screen Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Scree 8 les cprotor dot 8 oo timer Procedure 1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [2] Paper type set (Bypass). The Paper Type Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Select the paper type and weight in combination to be loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. (1) Touch the desired key in the Special setting section to highlight it. (2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the tray 4er. Repeat steps (1) and (2) for all the six keys. 4 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Paper Type / Special ee Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 5 Touch PRÉVIOUS SCREEN to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-23

[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the control panel, and also the volume of the touch key. NOTE: The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen. Key Operator Mode Screen Panel Contrast/ Key Sound Adjustment Screei w t re Procedure 1 Touch [7] Panel contrast/Key sound adj. to display the Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Screen. 2 Adjust the Backlight contrast or Buzzer volume, as desired. Touch the Dimmer arrow key to make the backlight contrast dimmer than currently displayed, or touch the Brighter arrow key to make the panel or backlight contrast brighter than currently displayed. Touch the Small or Big arrow key to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys. 3 Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-24

[8] Key Operator Data Setting Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Operator indicated on the Help Screen that develops from the Basic Screen. Key Operator Mode Screen Key Operator Data Setting Screen Procedure Touch [8] Key operator data setting to display the Key Operator Data Setting Screen. 2 Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the key operator name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad. 3 Touch Key Operator Tel. No. to highlight it, then enter a 5-digit extension number from the touch screen keypad. If the extension number is less than 5 digits, use a hyphen [+ to make it five. The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as a space on the Help Screen. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 14-25

[9] Weekly Timer The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required. In addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function. This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly Timer password is entered. To ensure the security of this management function, it is recommended that you establish a unique password, and keep it in a confidential file. The Weekly Timer is not initially activated. If this function needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer

• The power plugis inserted into the socket. The Weekly Timer will not function with the machine being unplugged, while the setting data will remain. - The power switch is turned on. - The current date and time are correctly set. The following Weekly Timer settings can be made. [11] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting Enable and disable the Timer function. [21 Timer Setting Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week. [3] Timer action ON/OFF Setting Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the specified month. [4] Lunch hour off setting Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will turn off and on. [5] Timer interrupt password set Require password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time. 14-26

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen Procedure

Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen displays, if a password is required. Otherwise, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen displays without the password requirement. NOTE: The Weekly Timer does not initially require the password setting. To ensure the security of this management function, it is recommended that you establish a unique password Ifthe Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer password, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Select the desired Weekly Timer function, and make settings, as required. To exit the Weekly Timer mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-27

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) [1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Select to activate or deactivate the Weekly Timer function. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen Procedure

Touch [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen. Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly Timer, or touch Weekly timer Off io deactivate Weekly Timer. The selected key will be highlighted. The default setting is Weekly Timer Off. NOTE: If you select Weekly timer On to activate this function, be sure to keep the power switch tumed on. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-28

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) [2] Timer Setting Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [2] Timer setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen. 2 When the screen is displayed, the ON-time of Monday is always highlighted. Enter a 2-digit ON-hour and a 2-digit ON-minute using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET. Monday OFF-time will be highlighted. Repeat this procedure to set all the On/Off times from Monday through Sunday. NOTES: + The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [01] is the first hour after midnight; and hour [24] is midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours. +_lf wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct time. + Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON, Monday OFF, Tuesday ON, Tuesday OFF. When setting Sunday OFF- time, Monday ON-time is highlighted again. + _IfON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on. + lfthe setting is 00:00-00:00, you will not be able to set the copiers off/on condition for specific days. - Be sure to enter the ON/OFF-time for a day off also, so that you can specify the machine working days on the Weekly Timer Working Day Individual/Collective Setting Screen. 3 To set the ON/OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week, touch Block timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen. When you open this screen, the ON and OFF times are always set at 00:00-00:00. Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one can be selected at a time. Enter the ON-time and OFF-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. See step 2 for details in entering the time. 14-29

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) 4 Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the setting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Touching CANCEL will restore the previous setting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-30

[9] Weekly Timer (continued) [31 Timer Action On/Off Setting Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the On-Off condition for specific days or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for Sundays. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen Keekly Lirer setting menu Select one sing Procedure Touch [3] Timer action ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen. 2 The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen, with timer-active days highlighted. To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day, touch the key for that day to change its indication. To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month. 3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week, touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen to highlight it. 4 Ifany change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to change the timer action, or touch NO to cancel. 5 Touch OK on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-31

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) [4] Lunch Hour Off Setting The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use the Lunch hour off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting. Only one off-time interval can be programmedl. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen Keekly Lirer setting menu Select one of à iter Procedure 1 Touch [4] Lunch hour off setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen. 2 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set OFF-time and Restart-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. 3 Touuh Function Invalid to de-activate the Lunch hour off function. The time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected. The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu item, from [1 "BE 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-32

[91 Weekly Timer (continued) [5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Procedure

Touch [5] Timer interrupt password set on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen. Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4-digit password, and then touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: When the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply by tuning the copier OFF, then ON. In this case, you will be asked to enter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the copier power on). ñ other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu item, rom [1]-[5]. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-33

[10] Control Panel Adjustment Use this feature to check the LCD touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted. Key Operator Mode Screen Control Panel Adjustment Screen Lcecreurron | our 10] Procedure 1 Touch [10] Control panel adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen. 2 Touch the “+ symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen. 3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line. 4 Touch the CHECK BUTTONS at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally. 5 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3, or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from 2 to 4 or contact your service representative. 6 Press [7] of the control panel keypad to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-34

[11] Tray Auto Select Setting Select whether the tray size setting will be detected or not detected when ATS/APS functions. If you select it to be detected, you may also select the priority of the detection for each tray. Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Procedure 1 gun [11] Tray auto select setting to display the Tray Auto Select Setting creen. 2 Onthe left half of the screen, touch to highlight each tray key, then select OFF or ON io specify whether the selected tray is to be automatically detected or not when ATS/APS functions. Tray keys specified as ATS/APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen. 3 Specify the priority of the trays. Touch to highlight the desired tray key, then change its priority by using Up À and Down Y arrow keys. 4 Touch OK io complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL io restore the previous setting. 14-35

[12] Power Save Setting Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated. Key Operator Mode Screen Power Save Setting Screen Procedure

Touch [12] Power save setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Timer Setting Screen. The periods of time currently selected for each power save function are located on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off indicators. Touch the arrow keys (A) and (w) in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off. NOTES: + The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting. + _Ifthe same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power, the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power. Touch OK on the Timer Setting Screen to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 4-36

[13] Memory Switch Setting This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. See pp. 14- 89-14-42 for details of Memory Settings. SW No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: Item Auto reset timer AUTO RESET key function RADF-Original effect Job memory auto recall (30) Finisher mode by Full-auto Initial by Key counter insert Erasure outside area of orig. RADF frame erasure selection Automatic tray switching Platen APS RADF APS Platen AMS RADF AMS Select tray when APS cancel Platen original size detect RADF original size detect Setting (default is underlined) OFF / 30 sec. / 60 sec. / 90 sec. / 120 sec./ 150 sec. / 180 sec. / 210 sec. / 240 sec. / 270 sec. / 300 sec. Full-Auto / Initial Setting RADF+AUTO RESET key selected / RADF selected OFF / ON Face down (Sub tray) / Non-sort / Sort / Staple sort / Stitch&Fold / Fold / Face up (Sub tray) OFF / ON Erased for except Platen (1:1) / Area outside of orig. erased / Erased for APS/ AMS only None / 1mm frame / 2mm frame / 3mm frame / 4mm frame / 5mm frame APS preferential tray / Tray 1 / Tray 2 / Tray 3 / Tray 4 / Bypass tray Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) ASR / B6R / 5.5”x8.5"R / B5 / A4 / 8.5x11 / Rotation Staple mode reset-function Job offset operating Continuation print Key click sound 1 SHOT indication time Power save screen START key latch function STOP key function Auto select of Booklet copy E.K.C. password Arrow key change (Image Shift) An interruption suspended way E.K.C. password input timing Sound (No paper, toner/JAM) Reserve copy function A6R ON-APS/AMS only / ON-APS/AMS/Reduce only / ON-Always OFF / ON OFF / ON Copier:OFF/Printer:OFF / Copier:ON/Printer:ON / Copier:ON/Printer:OFF / Copier:OFF/Printer:ON OFF / ON 3 seconds / 5 seconds Shut off mode / Low power mode OFF / ON JOB momentary stop / JOB cancel Automatic selection / Non Automatic selection Under 8 digits / 8 digits Decimal point off (1 STEP 1mm) / Decimal point on (1 STEP 0.1mm) Division of a number of copies / During of a number of copies Auto reset timer / Complete job OFF / 3 seconds / 5 seconds / 10 seconds Reserve copy by folder select / Reserve copy by original set 14-37

14-38 Touch [13] Memory switch setting to display the Memory Switch Setting Screen. To select the desired item, touch the arrow keys (A) and (w) at the right of the Memory Switch Setting Screen to highlight it. To scroll, touch the arrow keys at the lower left corner of the screen.

[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued) 3 To change the setting of the highlighted item, touch Change Setting Contents repeatedly till the desired setting is displayed. Repeat above steps 2 to 3 to make several changes in succession. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Memory Switch Setting Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. The following functions can be provided by the Memory Switch settings. [1] Auto reset timer Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine returns to the initial condition. [2] AUTO RESET key function Set the condition of the following modes when [AUTO RESET] is pressed: Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, Tray selection. [3] RADF-Original effect Set the machine condition when original is set on RADF in non-RADF mode with RADF unit closed. [4] Job memory auto recall (30) Job memory number 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Auto-reset is restored. This job recall function works only when Job number 30 is registered. [5] Finisher mode by Full-auto Set the Output Mode to be recalled when [AUTO RESET] is pressed. [6] Initial by Key counter insert Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted. [7] Erasure outside area of original Set the machine to delete the outside area of originals. [8] RADF frame erasure selection Set Frame erasure to function anytime in RADF mode. [9] Automatic tray switching When paper is depleted during a copying job, the copier continues copying by switching to another tray that contains the same size paper. [10] Platen APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the platen glass. (In reduction or enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio selected.) [11] RADF APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the RADF. (In reduction/enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio.) 14-39

[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued) [12] Platen AMS The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size. [13] RADF AMS After detecting the original size placed on the RADF the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when paper size is selected manually. [14] Select tray when APS cancel Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released. [15] Platen original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass. [16] RADF original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the RADF. [17] Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) Select the minimum original size detected from the platen glass. [18] Rotation Select to activate the Rotation function, activate Rotation only when APS/AMS functions, or activate Rotation only when APS/AMS/Reduce functions. [19] Staple mode reset-function Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode ON. (Sort mode is selected.) [20] Job offset operating Set the copier to offset the copies of different jobs. [21] Continuation print Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession. [22] Key click sound Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel. [23] 1 SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time function. [24] Power save screen Select the screen to display when pressing the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key. [25] START key latch function Activate or deactivate the latch function. [26] STOP key function Select to display or not to display the confirmation message when [STOP] key is pressed. [27] Auto select of Booklet copy Set the copier with FS-215 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stitch&Fold or Fold output mode is selected. 14-40

[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued) [28] E.K.C. password Select the acceptable number of digits for the EKC master key code. [29] Arrow key change (Image Shift) Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift. [30] An interruption suspend way Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. [31] E.K.C. password input timing Set the input timing for the EKC password. [32] Key click sound (No paper, toner/JAM) Select the duration of the buzzer that alerts when the machine is out of paper or when paper has misfed. [33] Reserve copy function Set the timing for the reserve job setting. [34] Change page no. pos. (booklet) Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp. [35] Trimmer (STD / Non STD size) Set the machine to allow trimming the folded or stapled & folded sheets in non- standard size (or wide size). [36] Timer which prohibits Print Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job. [37] Bookmark function Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job, set for all the following jobs, or deactivate the function. [38] Delete of overlay image When selecting (or storing) overlaying image data in HDD using Overlay Memory, select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected data (or overwriting the data of the same name previously stored in HDD). [39] Orig. direction/Binding mode Select to reset or save the original direction and bind position settings made on the Special Original popup menu and Output Mode popup menu after completion of each copying job. [40] SCREEN (Line Screen) Specify the initial state of the Line Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE ADJUST. [41] SCREEN (Dot Screen) Speci the initial state of the Dot Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE ADJUST. [42] Side 2 drum clock adjust mode Set the same magnification ratio for the reverse side as that of the front side in double-sided copying. 14-41

[13] Memory Switch Setting (continued) [43] Screen (FullColour - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Text/Photo specified in Special Original setting. [44] Screen (FullColour - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting. [45] Screen (Monochrome - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Black mode with Text/Photo specified in Special Original setting. [46] Screen (Monochrome - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREËN setting in Black mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting. [47] Screen (MonoColour - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Text/ Photo Specified in Special Original setting. [48] Screen (MonoColour - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting. [49] Colour gamut Specify the latitude of the colour in printing images. NOTE: + If Wide is selected, a blur may appear in high density area of the printed image. + Be sure to select Wide before making calibration on the printer controller. 14-42

[14] Machine Management List Print Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items. + Job memory list: Programmed contents of Job memory + User management list: Home position settings selected by user + E.K.C. management list: Machine information managed by EKC + Font pattern list: Font patterns used in the machine Key Operator Mode Screen Management List Print Menu Screen Procedure 1 Touch [14] Machine management list print on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Management List Print Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired item on the screen. The Basic Screen will resume automatically. 3 Press [START] to start printing the selected list. To suspend printing, press [STOP. Press [P] and [C] in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Management List Print Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-43

[15] Call Remote Centre When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your service representative. In case of the following machine trouble, select the Call Remote Centre option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem. Call for JAM concerns Call for SC concerns Toner bottle supply call Paper supply call Call for Image quality Call for others Key Operator Mode Screen Call Remote Service Centre Screen Procedure 1 Touch [15] Call remote centre on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Call Remote Service Centre Screen. 2 Touch the desired item key. The Start Call Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch Start to call. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Start Call Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-44

[16] Finisher Adjustment Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher. Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen

[16] Finisher Adjustment (continued) Procedure Touch [16] Finisher adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touchthe desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch +<->-to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN (to restore the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-46

[17] Front & Back Density Setting Use this function to make fine adjustments to the copy density of the front and back sides individually. Key Operator Mode Screen

Procedure 1 Touch [17] Front & Back Density setting to display the Front & Back Density Setting Screen. 2 Touch the desired adjustment key to make an adjustment for each side. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL io restore the previous setting. 14-47

[18] Scan Transmission Setting Use this function to change or delete the address registered for transmitting the image data scanned on the machine. The following three address types can be registered. + E-mail (entry name, e-mail address) + HDD (entry name, box No.) + FTP (profile name, host address, file path, login, password) NOTE: The [18] Scan Transmission Setting key will function only when IP-901 Print Controller is installed in the machine. Key Operator Mode Screen Scan Transmission Setting Screen Change E-Mail Address Screen Input Key Screen Procedure 1 Touch [18] Scan transmission setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 2 Select the desired address type. Touch E-Mail, HDD, or FTP to display the registered name keys on each page. 3 Select the name key to be changed or deleted. Touch the Lower arrow key to scroll, or Upper arrow key to return.

[18] Scan Transmission Setting (continued) To delete the address: Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch DELETE. The selected key will be deleted from the screen. To change the address: (1) Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch CHANGE. The subsequent screen according to the address type will be displayed. (2) Touch to highlight the registered item key on the left, touch Input key indicate to display the Input Key Screen, then change the information under the registered item key using the alphabet keys on the screen. Touch OK'to return to the previous screen. (3) Touch OK on each screen to complete the setting and restore the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 4 Touch OK on the Scan Transmission Setting Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 14-49

[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting Select the original density level of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Auto Reset occurs. Key Operator Mode Screen Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [19] Non-image area erase setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen. 2 Touch AUTO to let the machine select the density level automatically, or manually select the density level from the five exposure levels provided on the screen. 3 Touch OKto complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 14-50

[20] AE Adjustment Use this function to set the adjustment level of the automatic exposure (AE) suitable for either text originals or photo originals. Different setting is available for each of the colour mode and monochrome mode. Key Operator Mode Screen AE Adjustment Screen Procedure

Touch [20] AE adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the AE Adjustment Screen. 2 Touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to select the mode to be adjusted. The selected mode will be displayed in the message area. 3 Specify the adjustment level.

Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. The AE will function suitable for text originals if specified value is positive, or for photo originals if negative value is entered. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-51

[21] Execute Adjustment Operation Select the desired item to execute an adjustment operation. Auto gamma adjustment should be performed if reproducibility of the whole image is not satisfactory. Colour Regist auto adjustment should be performed if CMY colour layers show any gap compared with the original during successive copying. Toner refresh mode should be performed if you find the following conditions: Printed image shows a rough texture. White lines appear along with the paper feeding direction. Small dots appear randomly on the printed paper. Small white spot appears in the printed image. NOTE: The Toner refresh mode is effective only when the above conditions appear in cyan or magenta colour layer. If you find them in yellow or black layer, please contact your service representative to change the setting of this function. Key Operator Mode Screen Procedure 1 Touch [21] Execute adjust operation on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Execute Adjustment Operation Screen. Touch the desired item key to highlight it. Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen. The machine will execute the adjustment operation of the selected item automatically, with the executing adjustment message displayed in the message area (approx. 2’ 30”). 5 When the adjustment is completed, “Position original in the RADF face up” message will be displayed on the Basic Screen. BON 14-52

[22] Magnification Adjustment Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the magnification function. + Printer vertical mag. adj.: adjusts the vertical magnification of the printer system. + Printer horizontal mag. adj.: adjusts the horizontal magnification of the printer system. + Scanner vertical mag. adj.; adjusts the vertical magnification of the scanner system. Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen ü ÿ Key Operator Mode Screen ent Screen

Procedure 1 Touch [22] Magnification adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN io restore the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-53

[23] Timing Adjustment Use this mode to make fine adjustments of the timing for printing or scanning function. + Printer lead edge timing adj.: adjusts the lead edge timing. + Printer registration loop adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in the registration roller section. + Printer pre-registration adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in each tray and ADU pre-registration roller section. -_ Printer erasure amount adj.: conducts a leading edge erasure amount adjustment. + Scanner re-start timing adj.: adjusts re-start timing for original scanning. + RADF registration loop adj.: adjusts the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section. Key Operator Mode Screen Timing Adjustment Menu Screen Scanner Re-start Timing Adjustment Screen RADF Registration Loop Adjustment Screen Procedure 1 Touch [23] Timing adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 14-54

[23] Timing Adjustment (continued) 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-55

[24] Centring Adjustment Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the image centring function. - Printer centring adjustment: adjusts the mis-centring of images vertical to paper feed direction. + Scanner centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the platen original. + _RADF centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original. Key Operator Mode Screen NPrnte mir vaut Scanner (Platen) Centring Adjustment Screen Procedure

Touch [24] Centring adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch +<->- to select “+” or “-” as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-56

[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Use this function to make various adjustments concerning the gamma sensor. Key Operator Mode Screen Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen KEY CPU . Procedure

Touch [25] Printer Gamma Sensor adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen. Select the desired adjustment item on the screen. Six items are provided: LS200, LS150, DS200, DS150, CONTONE, and ED. Touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. NOTE: Some adjustment items cannot be displayed if the screen is specified as OFF state in the Memory Switch setting. Touching Adj. data reset will display the Reset Confirmation Screen. Touch YES to reset the adjustment value to the initial state, or touch NO to cancel. Touch COPY SCREEN to move to the Basic Screen to print a chart. Load several sheets of A4 paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, then press [START] to output the test chart. When output is completed, the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen will be restored, with the message “Please load output paper in Platen and push [START] button” displayed. Place the test chart face down on the platen glass with green arrow “<” pointing at the left side as shown below, and put about 10 sheets of blank copy paper on top of the chart. Green arrow Place the chart FACE DOWN 14-57

[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment (continued) 5 Touch the Start key on the screen. The machine starts the adjustment automatically. NOTE: If no paper is left in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, the adjustment will not start even if the Start key is touched. The message “Completed” will be displayed when the adjustment is completed normally. NOTE: If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test chart is placed properly. If any other error code is displayed, please contact your service representative. 6 Repeat the steps 2to 5 as desired. 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 14-58

Index Symbols [C] (CLEAR QTY.) key 2-6 [P] (COUNTER) key 2-6 Numerics

Call for Service Screen 5-2 Call Remote Centre 14-44 Cartridge housing 2-11 CAUTION 1-5 Caution indicator 1-2 Caution label 1-2 Centring Adjustment 14-56

CHECK key 2-6 Check Mode 4-4 Cleaning Image Scanning Section 13-16 Clearing Mishandied Paper 5-4 CMYK Model 7-2 CMYK value 7-24 Colour Adjustment 7-19 Colour Balance Adjustment 7-24 Colour Mode 3-2 Combination 10-10 Contrast 7-13, 7-29 Contrast Adjustment Dial 2-6 Control panel 2-3 Control Panel Adjustment 14-34 Control Panel Layout 2-6 Copier Initial Setting 14-10 Copy count 13-18 Copy Density 7-15 COPY key 2-6 Count/Set indicator 2-9 Counter List Screen 13-18 Cover sheet feeder control panel 2-12 Cover sheet feeding 8-19

Face down group exit 3-46 Face down non-sort exit 3-46 Face up group exit 3-46 Face up mode (with Finisher) 3-45 Face up mode (without Finisher) 3-41 Face up non-sort exit 3-46 Finisher Adjustment 14-45 Finisher door 2-10 Fixed magnification mode 3-23 Fixing unit 2-4 Fold mode 8-8 Frame/Fold Erasure 10-40 FREE JOB key 2-8 Front & Back Density Setting 14-47 Front door 2-3 FS-115/FS-215 Finisher 2-10 FULL COLOUR mode 3-2

Gloss Mode 7-14, 7-29 Group mode (with Finisher) 3-45 Group mode (without Finisher) 3-41

HELP key 2-6 Help Mode 4-16 Help Screen 4-16 High Compression 7-26 High Resolution 7-26 HSB Model 7-3 HSB value 7-21 Hue (H) 7-3 Image adjust icon 2-8 IMAGE ADJUST key 2-9 Image Detection 7-12 Image Insert 10-17 Image Shift 10-45 Improving Colour Copy Quality 7-14 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge 13-7 Installation space 1-8 Internal Machine Items 2-4 Interrupt Copying 4-8 INTERRUPT key 2-6 IP Address Setting 14-7

(continued) Line Screen 7-11 Loading Paper 2-22 Lock/Delete Job Memory 14-20 LT-211 Large Capacity Tray 2-13 Lunch Hour Off Setting 14-32 Machine Management List Print 14-43 Machine setting file (Web Utilities) 11-23 Magnification Adjustment 14-53 Main Body Specifications 6-2 Main Page 11-3 Main power switch 2-4 Manual Low Power 2-20 Manual Shut-Off 2-20 Memory indicator 2-9 Memory Overflow 5-9 Memory Switch Setting 14-37 Message area 2-9 Mixed Original 9-6 Modifying Colours 7-4 Multi-Page Enlargement 10-27 Multi-sheet bypass tray 2-3, 3-18 Munsell colour system 7-3

Non STD size mode 9-4 Non-Image Area Erase 10-30 Non-Image Area Erase Setting 14-50 Non-sort mode (with Finisher) 3-45 Non-sort mode (without Finisher) 3-41

Saturation (S) 7-3 SCAN JOB key 2-8 Scan Transmission Setting 14-48 Scan Transmission Setting (Web Utili- ties) 11-19 Scanner Function Setting 14-19 SCANNER key 2-6 Screen Setting 7-26 Secondary (Sub) tray 2-10 Sharpness 7-13, 7-29 Sheet/Cover Insertion 10-3 SINGLE COLOUR mode 3-2 Smooth Tone 7-26 Sort mode 3-45 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 2-9 Special paper 3-18, 12-8 Stamp 10-51 Standard/Optional Equipment 2-5 Staple mode 3-45 START key 2-6 STATUS key 2-9 Stitch & Fold mode 8-8 STOP key 2-6 STORE key 2-9 Store mode 3-33 System Initial Setting 14-4

Tab paper mode 9-4 Thick original mode 9-10 Thin original mode 9-10 Three primary colours of light 7-2 Three primary colours of pigment 7-2 Three-Fold mode 8-14 Timer Action On/Off Setting 14-31 TIMER indicator 2-6 Timer Interrupt Password Setting 14-33 Timer Setting 14-29 Timing Adjustment 14-54 Toner access door 2-3 Toner recovery box 2-3, 13-14 Toner recovery box icon 2-8 Top bind 3-52 Total counter 2-4 Tray Auto Select Setting 14-35 Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity 12-4 Trimmer unit tray 2-14 Trimming mode 8-16 Troubleshooting Tips 5-12 TU-109 Trimmer Unit 2-14 TU-109A kit 2-14 TYPE/SIZE key 2-9

| Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this manual. MANUFACTURER